LEXMARK

X792dtpe - Printer LEXMARK - Free user manual and instructions

Name: X792dtpe
Brand: LEXMARK
Rating: 6.5 (156 reviews)

Find the device manual for free X792dtpe LEXMARK in PDF.

📄 335 pages

EN ⬇ Download 💬 AI Question

Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

This manual is not available in your language

Desired language Your email address

User questions about X792dtpe LEXMARK

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Printer in PDF format for free! Find your manual X792dtpe - LEXMARK and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. X792dtpe by LEXMARK.

USER MANUAL X792dtpe LEXMARK

August 2010 www.lexmark.com

Machine type(s):

7562,4917

Model(s):

432, 436, dn1, dn2, gd1, gd2, dt1, dt2, gt1, gt2, df1, df2, gf1, gf2, d01, d02, g01, g02, t01, t02, g91, g92, f01, f02, g81, g82

Safety information....7

Learning about the printer....9

Thank you for choosing this printer!....9

Finding information about the printer....9

Printer configurations....10

Basic functions of the scanner....11

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass....12

Using the security lock feature....13

Understanding the printer control panel....14

Understanding the home screen....15

Using the touch-screen buttons....16

Additional printer setup....19

Installing internal options....19

Order of installation....37

Installing optional trays....37

Attaching cables....38

Verifying printer setup....39

Setting up the printer software....40

Setting up wireless printing....41

Installing the printer on a wired network....47

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port....49

Setting up serial printing....50

Setting up and using the home screen applications....52

Making the home screen applications work for you....52

Configuring Forms and Favorites....52

Configuring Scan to Network....54

Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server....55

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact....56

Saving paper and toner....56

Saving energy....57

Recycling....60

Loading paper and specialty media....62

Setting the paper size and type....62

Configuring Universal paper settings....62

Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray....63

Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder....66

Loading the multipurpose feeder....68

Linking and unlinking trays....71

Paper and specialty media guidelines....73

Paper guidelines....73

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights....76

Printing....79

Printing a document....79

Printing on specialty media....79

Printing confidential and other held jobs....82

Supported flash drives and file types....83

Printing from a flash drive....84

Printing information pages....85

Printing in black and white....86

Adjusting toner darkness....86

Supported finishing features....86

Canceling a print job....88

Copying....90

Making copies....90

Copying film photos....91

Copying on specialty media....91

Customizing copy settings....92

Placing information on copies....97

Canceling a copy job....97

Understanding the copy screens and options....98

E-mailing....101

Getting ready to e-mail....101

Creating an e-mail shortcut....102

E-mailing a document....103

Customizing e-mail settings....104

Canceling an e-mail....105

Understanding e-mail options....105

Faxing....108

Getting the printer ready to fax....108

Sending a fax....114

Creating shortcuts....115

Using shortcuts and the address book....116

Customizing fax settings....116

Canceling an outgoing fax....118

Understanding fax options....118

Holding and forwarding faxes....120

Scanning to an FTP address....122

Creating shortcuts....123

Understanding FTP options....124

Scanning to a computer or flash drive....127

Scanning to a computer....127

Scanning to a flash drive....128

Understanding the Scan Center features....128

Using the ScanBack Utility....128

Understanding scan profile options....129

Understanding printer menus....131

Menus list....131

Supplies menu....132

Paper menu....134

Reports menu....146

Network/Ports menu....147

Security menu....160

Settings menu....165

Help menu....217

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory....218

Statement of Volatility....218

Erasing volatile memory....219

Erasing non-volatile memory....219

Erasing printer hard disk memory....219

Configuring printer hard disk encryption....221

Maintaining the printer....222

Cleaning the exterior of the printer....222

Cleaning the scanner glass....223

Cleaning the ADF parts....224

Cleaning the printhead lenses....226

Adjusting scanner registration....227

Storing supplies....228

Checking the status of supplies....228

Ordering supplies....229

Replacing supplies....231

Moving the printer....235

Administrative support....237

Finding advanced networking and administrator information....237

Using the Embedded Web Server....237

Checking the status of the printer....237

Checking the virtual display....238

Setting up e-mail alerts....238

Viewing reports....238

Restoring factory default settings....239

Clearing jams....240

Avoiding jams....240

Understanding jam numbers and locations....240

200 paper jam....242

201 paper jam....242

202–203 paper jams....243

230 paper jam....244

231–239 paper jams....245
24x paper jam....245
250 paper jam....246
280–289 paper jams....247
290–292 paper jams....248
400–403 and 460–461 paper jams....248
431–438 paper jams....249
455 staple jam....249

Troubleshooting....252

The indicator light is blinking....252
Understanding printer messages....252
Solving basic printer problems....270
Solving printing problems....270
Solving copy problems....273
Solving scanner problems....276
Solving fax problems....278
Solving home screen applications problems....281
Solving option problems....284
Solving paper feed problems....287
Solving print quality problems....288
Solving color quality problems....301
Embedded Web Server does not open....304
Contacting customer support....305

Notices....306

Product information....306
Edition notice....306
Power consumption....310

Index....325

Safety information

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Thank you for choosing this printer!

We've worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs.

To start using your new printer right away, use the setup materials that came with the printer, and then skim the User's Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks. To get the most out of your printer, read the User's Guide carefully, and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site.

We're committed to delivering performance and value with our printers, and we want to make sure you're satisfied. If you do encounter any problems along the way, one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast. And if you find something we could do better, please let us know. After all, you are the reason we do what we do, and your suggestions help us do it better.

Finding information about the printer

What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:•Connecting the printer•Installing the printer software	Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site athttp://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media•Loading paper•Configuring printer settings•Viewing and printing documents and photos•Setting up and using the printer software•Configuring the printer on a network (depending on your printer model)•Caring for and maintaining the printer•Troubleshooting and solving problems	User's Guide—The User's Guideis available on the Software and Documentation CD.For updates, check our Web site athttp://support.lexmark.com.
Instructions for:•Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network•Troubleshooting printer connection problemsHelp using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a	Networking Guide—Open the Software and Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guidelink.printer software program or application, and then click Help.Click ? to view context-sensitive information.Notes:·The Help installs automatically with the printer software.·The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system.
Latest supplemental information, updates, and technical support:·Documentation·Driver downloads·Live chat support·E-mail support·Telephone support	Lexmark Support Web site—http://support.lexmark.comNote: Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact support so they may serve you faster:·Machine Type number·Serial number·Date purchased·Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or	region:·In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or athttp://support.lexmark.com.·In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer.

Printer configurations

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Printer configurations - 1

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Printer configurations - 2

text_image

Technical diagram showing three labeled mechanical or electronic device configurations with numbered parts

1	Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
2 ADF input tray
3	Printer control panel
4	Standard exit bin
5 Front door
6	Standard 550-sheet trays (Tray 1)
7 Multipurpose feeder
8	Side door
9 Jam access doors
10	Optional 2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder
11	Optional 550-sheet trays
12	Caster base

Basic functions of the scanner

The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:

Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
Send a fax using the printer control panel.
Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass - 1

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a document and a person silhouette, accompanied by a red arrow indicating a drop or error.

Use the ADF for multiple pages, including duplex pages.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a person icon and a red dashed line indicating a measurement or annotation path.

Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms).

Using the ADF

Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
Scan sizes from 76 x 139 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 215 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
Scan media weights from 52 to 120g / m^2 (14 to 32 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Scan or copy documents up to 215 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
•Copy books up to 25 mm (1 in.) thick.

Using the security lock feature

The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached, the printer is locked. Once locked, the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed. Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Using the security lock feature - 1

natural_image

Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Understanding the printer control panel

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Understanding the printer control panel - 1

text_image

Diagram of a remote control device with numbered labels pointing to key components such as C, E, and I/O ports.

Item Description
1	Display	Lets you view scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages
2	Indicator light	•Off—The power is off.•Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.•Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.•Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.
3	Sleep Activates	Sleep Mode or Hibernate ModeThe following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:• Entering or waking from Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is unilluminated.• Operating in Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.• Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.• Operating in Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is unilluminated, Sleep button is blinking amber in pulsing pattern.
4	Keypad Lets you	enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display
5	Submit Lets you	submit changes made in the printer settings
6	Stop/Cancel Stops all printer activityNote:A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.
7	Home Lets you	navigate back to the home screen
8	Card reader	Limits the use of certain printer functions to authenticated usersNote:The card reader may not be available on all printer models.
9	USB port	Lets you insert a USB flash drive to send data or to save scanned images

Understanding the home screen

When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.

Note: Buttons appearing on the home screen may vary depending on home screen customization settings.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Understanding the home screen - 1

text_image

157.184.136.43 Copy E-mail Bookmarks Fax Search Held Jobs Change Language Copy Shortcuts FTP USB Page 1 of 3 ? Status/ Supplies Ready.

Display item Description
Copy Opens the Copy menus
E-mail Opens the E-mail menus
Fax Opens the Fax menus
	Opens the printer menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
FTP Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus
Status message bar	Shows the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.Shows intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Status/Supplies	Displays a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing. Touch this button to access the messages screen for more information on the message.
USB Displays the files on a USB drive
Bookmarks	Lets you create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Held Jobs Displays all current held jobs

Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:

Display item Function
Release Held Fax If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this button.
Lock Device This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked and password has been set.Touching this button opens a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel.
Unlock Device This button appears on the screen w	when the printer is locked. The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears.Touching this button opens a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock the printer control panel.
Cancel Jobs Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The C	cel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print, Fax, and Network.The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:•Print job•Copy job•Fax profile•FTP•E-mail sendEach heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language Launches the Change Language	pop-up window that allows you to change the primary language of the printer.

Using the touch-screen buttons

Note: Your screens and buttons may vary depending on your options and administrative setup.

Sample touch screen

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Sample touch screen - 1

text_image

Copy from Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Copy to Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Plain Paper Scale Auto 100% Content Text/Photo Darkness Color On Sides (Duplex) 1 to 2 Sided Collate On Staple 3 Staples, Left Punch On Save as Shortcut (Other Feature) ICON (Setting) ? Log Out - Copies: 999 + Options Submit

Button Function
Submit Submits changes made in the printer settings
Sample Copy Prints a sample copy
Right arrow Scrolls to the right
Left arrow Scrolls to the left
Home Returns to the home screen
Right increase Lets you select a higher value
Left decrease Lets you select a lower value
Exit Lets you exit from the current screen
Tips Opens a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen

Other touch-screen buttons

Button Function
Accept Saves a setting
Cancel	•Cancels an action or a selection•Exits a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes
Reset Resets values on the screen
Unselected radio button Indicates that an item is not selected
Selected radio button Indicates a selection
Search Lets you search current held jobs
Warning Indicates a warning or error condition

Features

Feature Description
Menu trail line:Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >Number of Copies	A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu.Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default setting.
Attendance message alert	If an attendance message affects a function, this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing internal options - 1

You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.

Available internal options

- Memory cards

-Printer memory
—Flash memory
-Fonts

- Firmware cards

Bar Code
-PrintCryption ^TM

•Lexmark ^TM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)

-RS-232-C Serial ISP
-Parallel 1284-B ISP
—MarkNet ^TM N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
—MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
—MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP

Accessing the system board

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Accessing the system board - 1

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

1 Open the cover.

2 Remove the metal panel.

a Turn the screws on the panel counterclockwise to remove them.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Accessing the system board - 2

natural_image

Diagram of an open computer with red circular arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

b Shift the metal panel to the left to disengage the hooks, then pull forward to remove it.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Accessing the system board - 3

natural_image

Diagram of an open computer with a green circuit board inside, showing internal components and a red arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Accessing the system board - 4

text_image

Diagram of an internal computer motherboard with numbered components labeled 1 to 4

1 Memory card connector

2 Firmware and flash memory card connectors

3 Internal print server connector

4 Hard disk connector

4 Reattach the system board cover.

a Reinstall the hooks on the left side of the metal panel into the slots on the system board cage, and then shift to the right.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Accessing the system board - 5

natural_image

3D diagram of an open computer with a green circuit board inside, showing internal components and a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

b Align and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Accessing the system board - 6

natural_image

Diagram of an open file organizer with red circular arrows indicating internal components (no text or symbols present)

c Close the cover.

Installing a memory card

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a memory card - 1

An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.

1 Access the system board.

For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 20.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2 Unpack the memory card.

Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 On the system board, open the memory card connector latches.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a memory card - 2

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a memory card - 3

natural_image

Diagram of a dual-layer electronic component with labeled parts (1 and 2), showing green PCB and black connectors (no text or symbols beyond labels)

1 Notch

2 Ridge

5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a memory card - 4

natural_image

Diagram of a mechanical assembly with red arrows indicating force or direction, showing components on a green background (no text or symbols)

6 Reattach the system board cover.

Installing a flash memory or firmware card

The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a flash memory or firmware card - 1

1 Access the system board.

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2 Unpack the card.

Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a flash memory or firmware card - 2

natural_image

3D mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with yellow dots and numbered parts (1, 2), no readable text or symbols present.

1 Plastic pins

2 Metal pins

4 Push the card firmly into place.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a flash memory or firmware card - 3

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Notes:

- The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board. - Be careful not to damage the connectors.

5 Reattach the system board cover.

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 1

1 Access the system board.

For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 20.

2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.

Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.

3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 2

natural_image

Close-up of a computer monitor showing the circuit board and internal components, with a red arrow indicating a location or action (no text or symbols present)

4 Remove the printer hard disk.

For more information, see "Removing a printer hard disk" on page 36.

5 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 3

text_image

Diagram showing a computer motherboard with labeled parts and a magnified view highlighting component 1 with red arrows.

6 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board, and press down until the tee clicks into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and the tee is seated firmly on the system board.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 4

natural_image

3D diagram of an electronic device showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

7 Install the ISP on the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then slant it toward the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 5

natural_image

Diagram of a computer motherboard showing a green circuit board and a red directional arrow (no text or symbols)

8 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 6

natural_image

Close-up of a green printed circuit board with visible components and a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols)

9 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not yet tighten the thumbscrew.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 7

natural_image

Diagram of a computer monitor with green circuit board and red directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

10 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 8

natural_image

Close-up of a computer motherboard with a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

11 Tighten the long thumbscrew.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.

12 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.

Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing an Internal Solutions Port - 9

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with blue and gray components, no visible text or symbols

13 Reattach the system board cover.

Installing a printer hard disk

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 1

1 Access the system board.

For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 20.

2 Unpack the printer hard disk.

3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 2

natural_image

Diagram of a computer monitor with an open circuit board and a red arrow indicating a location or change (no text or symbols present)

Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.

To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:

a Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 3

natural_image

3D diagram of a computer motherboard with a close-up inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.

c Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 4

natural_image

Diagram of a computer motherboard with visible circuit board and connectors, showing a red arrow indicating a directional change (no text or symbols present)

d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.

Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 5

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with blue blocks and a red arrow indicating a directional component (no text or symbols)

To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board:

a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board, and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 6

natural_image

3D mechanical assembly diagram showing a green circuit board connected to a component with red directional arrow (no text or symbols)

b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 7

natural_image

Diagram of a computer motherboard with an inset showing a close-up of a component detail (no text or symbols present)

c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.

Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing a printer hard disk - 8

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with a curved component and a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

4 Reattach the system board cover.

Removing a printer hard disk

Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

1 Access the system board.
For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 20.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Removing a printer hard disk - 1

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with blue components and a gray curved component, no visible text or symbols

3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place, and then remove the printer hard disk.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Removing a printer hard disk - 2

text_image

Technical diagram showing a circuit board with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting a specific part.

Additional printer setup

4 Set the printer hard disk aside.
5 Reattach the system board cover.

Order of installation

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Order of installation - 1

www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Order of installation - 2

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Order of installation - 3

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:

•Caster base
- Optional spacer
- Optional 550-sheet trays or 2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder
•Standard 550-sheet trays
- Printer

For information on installing a caster base, a 550- or 2,000-sheet optional tray, spacer, or any of the finishers, see the setup documentation that came with the option.

Installing optional trays

The printer supports the following optional input sources:

550-sheet tray
•2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing optional trays - 1

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing optional trays - 2

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing optional trays - 3

1 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.

2 Place the tray near the printer.

3 Turn the printer off.

4 Align the printer to the tray, and then lower the printer into place.

Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked. When necessary, remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing optional trays - 4

text_image

Technical diagram of a multi-layered printer with labeled parts 1 and 2

1 Standard 550-sheet tray (Tray 1)

2 Optional 550-sheet trays

5 Turn the printer back on.

6 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source.

For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 41.

Attaching cables

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Attaching cables - 1

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.

Be sure to match the following:

•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Attaching cables - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled components and magnified view highlighting internal connectors.

1	USB portWarning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
2	Ethernet port

Verifying printer setup

Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option and install it again.
Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.

If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

For Windows users

1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.

If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do the following:

a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Recommended Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Close all open software applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the software installer package.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Using the World Wide Web

1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
2 From the Drivers & Downloads menu, click Driver Finder.
3 Select your printer, and then select your operating system.
4 Download the driver and then install it.

Updating available options in the printer driver

Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs.

For Windows users

1 Open the Printers folder:

a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Select your printer.

3 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Click Update Now - Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options.
6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences > Print & Fax.
2 Select your printer, and then click Options & Supplies.
3 Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.
4 Click OK.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities > Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
4 From the pop-up menu, choose Installable Options.
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.

Setting up wireless printing

Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP) and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) are types of security used on a network.

Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network

Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.

SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:

—WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.

—WPA or WPA2 passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

—No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:

Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X username and password
•Certificates

Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)

Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure:

Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.

1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 1

text_image

Diagram showing a device with labeled components, including a cable and plug connection, with numbered annotations.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 2

natural_image

Diagram of a device with a magnified circular section highlighting a red arrow, showing internal components without any text or symbols.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 3

Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 4

Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.

2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 5

3 Click Recommended Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup.

Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.

6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 6

natural_image

Diagram showing connections between a computer and an electronic device, with two magnified views of the device (no text or symbols present)

Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly.

7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
8 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 2 through 6 and step 8 for each computer.

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)

Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.

Prepare to configure the printer

1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Prepare to configure the printer - 1

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with labeled parts and connection points, including numbered annotations 1 and 2.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Prepare to configure the printer - 2

natural_image

Illustration of a computer tower with a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to the screen (no text or symbols present)

2 Locate the printer MAC address.

a From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Network Setup Page

b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).

Note: You will need this information later.

Additional printer setup

Enter the printer information

1 Access the AirPort options:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Network > AirPort

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort

2 From the Network Name pop-up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y's are the last six digits of the MAC address you obtained earlier from the printed network setup page.
3 Open a Safari browser.
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double-click the printer name.

Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.

6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored.

Configure the printer for wireless access

1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect your wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Network > AirPort

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort

7 From the Network pop-up menu, select the name of your wireless network.

Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly

To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

1 Install a PPD file on the computer:

a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK. All necessary software applications are installed on the computer.
f Click Close when installation is complete.

2 Add the printer:

a For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.

b For AppleTalk printing:

Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

6 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.

Installing the printer on a wired network

These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections.

Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.

For Windows users

1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.

If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do the following:

a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select Administrator Tools.

3 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
4 Follow the instructions on the computer screen, and then select Guided Setup (Recommended).
5 Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so.
6 Select your printer from the list, and then click Continue.

Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address.

a From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Network Setup Page

b In the TCP/IP section of the network setup page, look for IP Address.

Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

3 Install the drivers, and then add the printer.

a Install a PPD file on the computer:

1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the installer package for the printer.
2 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 Select a destination, and then click Continue.

4 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
5 Enter the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.
6 Click Close when installation is complete.

b Add the printer:

- For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.

- For AppleTalk printing:

Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop-up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.

Note: If the printer does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more information, contact your system support person.

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port

When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address.

Notes:

If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
If the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same, instead of by IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations.
If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection, disconnect the wired connection, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on again. This will enable the wireless ISP.
Only one network connection at a time is active. If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless, you must first turn the printer off, connect the cable (to switch to a wired connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer on.

For Windows users

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.

3 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
4 Press Enter, or click OK.

The printer folder opens.

5 Locate the printer that has changed.

Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.

6 Right-click the printer.

7 Click Properties > Ports tab.
8 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
9 Type the new IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" field.

10 Click OK > Close.

For Macintosh users

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.

2 Add the printer:

- For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

a From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click +, and then click the IP tab.
c Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

a From the Finder, navigate to:

Applications > Utilities

b Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
c From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
d Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.

- For AppleTalk printing:

Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

In Mac OS X version 10.5

a From the Apple menu, navigate to:

System Preferences > Print & Fax

b Click +, and then navigate to:

AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

a From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
b Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
c From the Printer List, click Add.
d Click the Default Browser tab > More Printers.
e From the first pop-up menu, select AppleTalk.
f From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
g Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.

Setting up serial printing

In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing, it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available.

After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.

1 Set the parameters in the printer:

a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b Locate the submenu with serial port settings.
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d Save the new settings, and then print a menu settings page.

2 Install the printer driver:

a Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.

If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do the following:

1 Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type D: \setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

b Click Custom Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select Connect through a port discovered on your computer, and then select a port.
d If the port is not on the list, then click Refresh or navigate to:

Add port > select a port type > enter necessary information > OK

e Click Continue.

1 If you want to add another printer, then click Add Another.
2 If you want to make changes, then select a printer, and then click Edit.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

f Click Finish.

3 Set the COM port parameters:

After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.

Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.

a Open the Device Manager.

1 Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.

b Look for Ports, and then click + to expand the list of available ports.

c Right-click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).

d Click Properties.

e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer. Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.

f Click OK, and then close all the windows.

g Print a test page to verify printer installation.

Setting up and using the home screen applications

Making the home screen applications work for you

Button Function
Forms and Favorites	Allows you to access frequently used forms and bookmarks.Creates your own index of forms, information sheets, and other materials you print often.To print a form, see “Printing forms” on page 53.
Scan to Network	Lets users scan their documents to specified network destinations.

You can set up and use the home screen applications by using the home screen buttons or the Embedded Web Server. To open the Embedded Web Server, type your printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Network/Ports menu.
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

Configuring Forms and Favorites

The Forms and Favorites solution provides users with quick and easy access to frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed.

The printer Bookmark function is used to create a link to a form or electronic file at a predetermined URL or network location. These files are then accessed from the Forms and Favorites icon.

When adding bookmarks from the printer Embedded Web Server, more configuration options are available than when adding bookmarks from the printer control panel.

Adding bookmarks using the printer control panel

Note: Bookmarks added from the printer control panel must be edited from the printer Embedded Web Server.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Forms and Favorites > Create Bookmark > enter a name for the new bookmark > Submit

This name will be displayed in the Forms menu when selecting a form to print.

2 Select Network, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS to specify the network location or the protocol of the bookmark, and then touch Submit.

3 Choose an authentication option, or enter the URL or network location of the form.

Note: The printer does not verify the validity of the URL or network location. Make sure that the location is entered correctly.

4 Touch Submit.

Adding bookmarks using the Embedded Web Server

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions > Forms and Favorites.

2 Under the Bookmarks field, choose Add.

Note: You can also edit or delete a bookmark.

3 In the Name field, type a new bookmark name.

4 From the Location list, choose the protocol or specify if it is located in a network folder. You may choose Network, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.

5 In the PIN field, type a four-digit number. This field is optional and will require users to enter a PIN when printing the bookmark.

6 Type the network address, the network domain name, the port, or the URL based on the location of the bookmark specified in Step 4.

7 Under Authentication Options, select whether to require user authentication for this destination. The credentials are used to access the network destination.

8 In the sections that follow, adjust the settings as necessary:

- Select check boxes to allow users to modify settings.

- Use radio buttons and drop-down menus to specify the default settings.

9 Click Apply to save the new bookmark.

Printing forms

From the home screen, navigate to:

Forms and Favorites > select background to use > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > Submit

Configuring Scan to Network

Scan to Network lets users of a printer scan their documents to network destinations specified by the network administrator. After the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer(s) using the Embedded Web Server.

Configuring a destination using the Embedded Web Server

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions > Scan to Network > Configure.
2 Click Add.

Note: You can also edit or delete existing destinations.

3 Type a name for the destination.
4 Select Network Folder or FTP Address, and then configure the selected destination.
5 Under Authentication Options, select whether to require user authentication for this destination or not. The credentials are used to access the network destination.
6 In the sections that follow, adjust the settings as necessary:

Select check boxes to allow users to modify settings.
Use radio buttons and drop-down menus to specify the default settings.

7 Click OK.

8 Repeat to add, edit, or delete destinations.
9 Click Apply.

Scanning documents at the printer

1 Load the document into the scanner.

Note: Documents may be loaded into the scanner in multiple ways. For information on the different methods of loading documents into the scanner, see the User's Guide that came with the printer.

2 Touch the application icon.
3 Select the destination where you want to receive the scanned document.

Note: After steps 2 or 3, you may be required to enter the user name and password used to access the printer depending on how the printer and the particular destination are configured. Contact your system support person for login information.

4 Some additional job options may be available depending on how the application has been configured. Follow the instructions on the screen to update the options. Contact your system support person for more information on each option.
5 Touch Scan It or Send It. Depending on how the application has been configured, you may have the option to preview and make adjustments to scanned pages.

6 To scan additional documents, load the next document into the scanner and select one of the following from the confirmation screen:

Touch Yes, to same destination to scan the document to the previous destination.
Touch Yes, to a different destination to scan the document to a different destination.
Touch No to finish the operation and return to the printer Home screen.

Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server

You can export embedded solution configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one or more additional printers.

Exporting a configuration

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions > Scan to Network.
2 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
3 Click Configure > Export.
4 Follow the instructions in the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then enter a unique file name or use the default name.

Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export until the settings file is saved.

Importing a configuration

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions > Scan to Network.
2 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
3 Click Configure > Import.
4 Browse to the saved configuration file, and then load or preview it.

Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, refresh the browser, and then click Apply.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode".

Using recycled paper

As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 74.

Conserving supplies

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2-sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N-Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it.
Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see "Avoiding jams" on page 240.

Print in black and white

To print all text and graphics using only the black print cartridge, set the printer to Black Only. For more information, see "Printing in black and white" on page 86.

Saving energy

Using Eco-Mode

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco-Mode > select a setting > Submit.

Choose To
Off	Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer.
Energy	Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.When the printer enters Sleep mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off.If scanning is supported, then the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Energy/Paper	Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Paper	Enable the automatic duplex feature.Turn off print log features.

Reducing printer noise

To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting > Submit.

Choose To
OffNote: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing.	Use factory default settings. This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer.
On Reduce printer noise.	Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off.The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.

Adjusting Sleep Mode

To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode.

Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.

3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.

4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts

2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
3 Touch Submit.

Using Hibernate Mode

Hibernate is an ultra-low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and all other systems and devices are powered down safely.

Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop-down, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button > Hibernate

2 Touch Submit.

Adjusting the brightness of the display

To save energy, or if you have trouble reading your display, then adjust the brightness of the display.

Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings

2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears, and then select a setting.
3 Touch Submit.

Setting the standard exit bin light

To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.

Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.

The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.

When Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then the light setting is Dim.

When in Sleep Mode, then the light is off.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting.
3 From the Normal/Standby Mode list, select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby mode.
4 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting

2 Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Mode to select the light settings for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby Mode.
3 Touch Submit.

Recycling

Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Loading paper and specialty media

This section explains how to load the 550-sheet trays, the 2,000-sheet tray, and the multipurpose feeder. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.

Setting the paper size and type

The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.

From the home screen navigate to:

Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:

Units of Measure
Portrait Width
Portrait Height

Notes:

The largest supported Universal size is 216 × 1219 ~mm (8.5 x 48 in.).
The smallest supported Universal size is 76 × 127 ~mm (3 x 5 in.) and loaded in the multipurpose feeder only.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit

Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray

The printer has one standard 550-sheet tray (Tray 1), and may have one or more optional 550-sheet trays. All 550-sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray - 1

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

1 Pull the tray out.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray - 2

natural_image

Illustration of a printer with an open lid and internal components, showing no text or symbols.

Notice the size indicators on the bottom of the tray. Use these indicators to help position the length and width guides.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray - 3

text_image

Technical diagram of a device with labeled ports and zoomed-in insets showing internal components like LTR, A4, and -M.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray - 4

natural_image

3D diagram of a printer internal structure with highlighted components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.

Note: The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, push the button on top of the length guide backward. To lock, push the button forward when a length has been selected.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray - 5

text_image

Diagram showing a device with three labeled components (1, 2, 3) and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray - 6

natural_image

Two illustrations showing hands holding a folded paper or document with red directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.

Loading paper and specialty media

Notes:

- Place print side facedown for duplex printing. - Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.

- Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray.

- Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing.

- Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Notes: - 1

natural_image

Diagram of a printer drawer with an inset showing a close-up of the cover area (no text or symbols present)

6 Insert the tray.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Notes: - 2

natural_image

Illustration of a printer with a paper feed into a drawer, showing internal components and a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

7 From the printer control panel, verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded.

Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder

The high-capacity feeder can hold up to 2,000 sheets of A4-, letter-, or legal-size paper (80 g/m ^2 or 20 lb).

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder - 1

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.

1 Pull the tray out.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder - 2

natural_image

Illustration of an open computer with a red downward arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

2 Adjust the width guide as necessary.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder - 3

text_image

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled parts and an inset view of the printer's internal compartment.

3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder - 4

natural_image

Two illustrations showing hands holding a curved object with red directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Loading paper and specialty media

4 Load paper into the tray with the print side faceup.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder - 5

text_image

ABC

Note: Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading the tray can cause paper jams.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder - 6

natural_image

Diagram of a printer internal structure showing paper feed, paper holder, and paper tray (no text or symbols)

Notes:

Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.
Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray.
Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing.

5 Insert the tray.

Loading the multipurpose feeder

The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media, such as transparencies, labels, card stock, and envelopes. It can be used for single-page or manual printing, or as an additional tray.

The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:

•100 sheets of 75-g/m ^2 (20-lb) paper
•10 envelopes
•75 transparencies

The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media within the following dimensions:

•Width—89 mm (3.5 in.) to 229 mm (9.02 in.)
•Length—127 mm (5 in.) to 1270 mm (50 in.)

Note: Maximum width and length can be applied only to short-edge feeding.

Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.

1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 1

natural_image

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

2 For paper or specialty media that is longer than letter-size paper, gently pull the extension until it is fully extended.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 2

natural_image

Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing base, cladding, and paper feed (no text or symbols)

Loading paper and specialty media

3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Paper

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 3

natural_image

Two illustrations showing hands holding a curved object with red directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Envelopes

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 4

natural_image

Two technical illustrations showing hands holding a card and a closed envelope, with red arrows indicating movement or force direction (no text or symbols)

Transparencies

Note: Avoid scratching or touching the print side.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 5

natural_image

Illustration showing two hand positions: one holding a curved object, the other holding a flat sheet with bidirectional arrows (no text or symbols)

4 Push the paper pick tab, and then load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop, and then release the paper pick tab.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 6

text_image

Diagram showing printer printing process with numbered annotations and magnified detail view

Warning—Potential Damage: Pulling the paper out, without pushing the paper pick tab first, may cause jams or the paper pick tab to break.

- Load paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the short edge entering the printer first.

- For duplex letterhead printing, place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last.

- Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Loading the multipurpose feeder - 7

natural_image

Diagram of a printer's internal structure with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

Notes:

Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter.
Load only one size and type of paper at a time.

5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack. Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Notes: - 1

natural_image

Diagram showing a printer or printer with a paper sheet being inserted, no text or symbols present

6 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder Size and MP Feeder Type) based on the paper or specialty media loaded.

Linking and unlinking trays

Linking trays

Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.

The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder. Size to appear as a menu item.

The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Unlinking trays

Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.

Change one of the following tray settings:

- Paper Type

Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom name.

•Paper Size

Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.

Linking exit bins

Link exit bins to create a single output source. The printer automatically uses the next available bin as the output source.

The standard exit bin holds up to 550 sheets of 20-lb paper. If you need additional output capacity, you can purchase other optional exit bins.

Note: Not all exit bins support every paper size and type.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Bin Setup

2 Touch the bin or bins you want to link, and then touch Configure Bins > Link.

Assigning a custom paper type name

Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a custom paper type name > select a tray > Submit

Creating a custom name for a paper type

If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit.

Note: This custom name will replace the Custom Type [x] name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus.

3 Click Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit.

Configuring a custom name

If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types > select the custom name you want to configure > select a paper or specialty media type > Submit.

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper guidelines

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176g / m^2 (16 to 47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60g / m^2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75g / m^2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182× 257mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90g / m^2 (24 lb) or heavier paper.

Note: Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m ^2 –176 g/m ^2 (17 lb–47 lb bond) paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, the toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

For 60 to 135g / m^2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135g / m^2 , grain short is recommended.

Fiber content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Selecting paper

Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.

To help avoid jams and poor print quality:

•Always use new, undamaged paper.
- Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
- Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
- Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
- Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

Use grain long for 60 to 90g / m^2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190^ C ( 374^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.

Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190^ C ( 374^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.

While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:

Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
• Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)

Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.

Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.

Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.

Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter's product list for special applications is maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:

1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m ^-2 certified paper, lower weight paper, or recycled paper.

Unacceptable paper examples

Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm ( ± 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m ^2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents

For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.

Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60%.
Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support.

Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal Paper Size.

Supported paper sizes

Measurements apply to simplex (one-sided) printing only. For duplex (two-sided) printing, the minimum size is 139.7 x 210 mm (5.50 x 8.27 in.).

Paper size Dimensions Standard	550-sheet tray (Tray 1)	Optional 550-sheet tray	Optional 2,000-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder	Duplexer
A4 210 x 297 mm(8.27 x 11.7 in.)	√	√	√	√	√
A5	148 x 210 mm(5.83 x 8.27 in.)	√	√	X	√
A6	105 x 148 mm(4.13 x 5.83 in.)	XXXX		√
JIS B5	182 x 257 mm(7.17 x 10.1 in.)	√	√	X	√
Letter	215.9 x 279.4 mm(8.5 x 11 in.)	√	√	√	√
Legal 215.9 x 3556 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)	√	√	√	√	√
Executive	184.2 x 266.7 mm(7.25 x 10.5 in.)	√	√	X	√
Oficio (México)	215.9 x 340.4 mm(8.5 x 13.4 in.)	√	√	X	√
^1 Supported by X790 models only. ^2 This formats the envelope size setting for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.

Paper size Dimensions Standard		550-sheet tray (Tray 1)	Optional 550-sheet tray	Optional 2,000-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder	Duplexer
Folio 215.9 x 330.2 mm(8.5 x 13 in.)		√	√	X	√	√
Statement 139.7 x 215.9 mm(5.5 x 8.5 in.)		√	√	X	√	√
Universal Note: Turn size sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes.	148 x 210 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)	√	√	X	√	√
	76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)	XXXX			√
	76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 914.4 mm (8.5 x 36 in.) ^1	XXXX			√
	76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 1219.2 mm (8.5 x 48 in.) ^1	XXXX			√
7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch)	98.4 x 190.5 mm (3.875 x 7.5 in.)	XXXX			√
9 Envelope 98.4 x 226.1 mm (3.875 x 8.9 in.)		XXXX			√
Com 10 Envelope	104.8 x 241.3 mm (4.12 x 9.5 in.)	XXXX			√
DL Envelope	110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in.)	XXXX			√
C5 Envelope	162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.01 in.)	XXXX			√
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in.)		XXXX			√
Other Envelope ^2	85.7 x 165 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (3.375 x 6.50 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)	XXXX			√
^1 Supported by X790 models only. ^2 This formats the envelope size setting for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.

Supported paper types and weights

The printer supports 60–176 g/m ^2 (16–47 lb) paper weights for one-sided printing. Two-sided printing is supported on 64–176 g/m ^2 (17–47 lb) paper weights.

Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.

Paper type Standard	550-sheet tray (Tray 1)	Optional 550-sheet tray	Optional 2,000-sheet tray	Multipurpose feeder	Duplexer
Paper•Plain•Bond•Glossy•Colored•Custom Type [x]•Letterhead•Light•Heavy•Preprinted•Rough/Cotton•Recycled	√	√	√	√	√
Card stock X	√	√		√	√
Transparencies^1,2	XXXX			√
Labels^3 •Paper•Vinyl	√	√	X	√	√
Envelopes^4	XXXX			√
^1 This media is not supported by the duplexer. ^2 Do not use inkjet or 3M CG3710 transparencies. ^3 Paper labels are supported. Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments, and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life. For more information, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site athttp://support.lexmark.com. ^4 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed facedown on a table.

Printing

This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancelation. The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see "Avoiding jams" on page 240 and "Storing paper" on page 76.

Printing a document

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
2 Send the print job:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust settings as necessary.
d Click OK > Print.

For Macintosh users

a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.

b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3 Click Print.

Printing on specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.

- Observe proper page orientation.

Source Print side Paper orientation
-Standard 550-sheet tray-Optional 550-sheet tray-Optional 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder	Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup.	The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the left side of the tray.
Duplex (two-sided) printing from trays	Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown.	The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the right side of the tray.
Multipurpose feeder (simplex printing)	Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown.	The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder first.
Multipurpose feeder (duplex printing)	Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup.	The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder last.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers.

Tips on using transparencies

Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only.
From the Paper menu, set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency.
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
For best performance, use envelopes made from 90-g/m ^2 (24-lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed 70-g/m ^2 (20-lb bond) weight.
Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

—Have excessive curl or twist.

—Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
—Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
—Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.

—Have an interlocking design.
—Have postage stamps attached.
—Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
—Have bent corners.
—Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.

- Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels

Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Note: Paper labels are supported. Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments, and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life.

For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

When printing on labels:

- Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:

The labels can withstand temperatures up to 190^ (374°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

- Do not use labels with slick backing material.

Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non-oozing adhesive.
Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.

When printing on card stock:

•Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
- Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
- Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper-handling problems.

Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.
Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
Use grain short card stock when possible.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Storing print jobs in the printer

You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.

All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.

Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.

Print job type Description
Confidential	Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the control panel.Note:The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 0–9.
Verify	Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve	Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu.
Repeat	Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.

Printing confidential and other held jobs

Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.

For Windows Users

1 With a document open, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
2 Click Other Options > Print and Hold.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 Go to the printer to release the print job.

From the home screen:

- For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > your PIN > your print job name > number of copies > Print

•For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > your user name > your print job name > number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select your print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 Go to the printer to release the print job.

From the home screen:

- For confidential print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > your PIN > your print job name > number of copies > Print

•For other print jobs, navigate to:

Held jobs > your user name > your print job name > number of copies > Print

Supported flash drives and file types

Flash drive File type

•Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)

•SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)

Notes:

Hi-Speed USB flash drives must support the Full-Speed standard. Devices supporting only USB low-speed capabilities are not supported.
USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.

Documents:

.pdf
.pcx
•.xps
- .dcx

Images:

•.gif
• JPEG
.jpg
•.bmp
•.TIFF
•.tif
-.png

Printing from a flash drive

Notes:

- Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the printer control panel. - You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

The USB Drive home screen appears.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Notes: - 1

natural_image

Illustration of a printer's front panel with a blue indicator light and red arrow pointing to the screen (no text or symbols present)

Notes:

If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.
If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Notes: - 1

text_image

Safety warning sign with crossed-out tool and prohibition symbol, indicating no proper use of a tool or device.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A loss of data can occur.

2 From the printer control panel, touch Print from USB, and then select the document you want to print.

3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.

Notes:

- Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

- If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs.

Printing information pages

Printing a font sample list

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Printing

Reports > Print Directory

Printing print quality test pages

Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down and 6MNO while turning the printer on.
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.

4 Touch Print Quality Pages Menu > Print Quality Pages.
5 Touch Exit Config Menu to return to the home screen.

Printing in black and white

From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit

Adjusting toner darkness

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.

Supported finishing features

The printer supports the following finishing features:

-Stacker
•StapleSmart finisher
- Two-, Three-, or Four-hole punch
-5-Bin mailbox

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Supported finishing features - 1

text_image

Technical diagram of a multi-layered printer with labeled parts 1 and 2

1	Standard bin
2 Finisher bin

Standard bin

•The paper capacity is 500 sheets.
- Finishing options are not supported in this bin.
•Envelopes are routed here.

Finisher bin

•The paper capacity is 500 sheets.
•Envelopes, A5, A6 and Statement paper are not supported in this bin.

Finishing features

Size Two-hole punch Three- or four-hole	punch	5-bin Mailbox StapleSmart Finisher
A4	√	√	√
A5 X X X		√

Size Two-hole punch Three- or four-hole		punch	5-bin Mailbox StapleSmart Finisher
Executive	√	√	√	√
Folio X	√		√	√
JIS B5	√	√	√	√
Legal	√	√	√	√
Letter	√	√	√	√
Statement X X			√	√
Universal X X			√	√
Envelopes (any size) X	X X		√
Oficio	√	√	√	√

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Canceling a print job from the computer

For Windows users

1 Open the printers folder:

a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.

2 Double-click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences > Print & Fax > Open Print Queue.
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.
3 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier:

1 From the Finder, navigate to:

Go > Applications

2 Double-click Utilities > Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Double-click the printer icon.
4 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.

Copying

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 1

text_image

Diagram showing printer printing a document with a red arrow and a person icon, likely illustrating a print or documentation process.

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a person icon and a red arrow indicating direction, likely illustrating a scanning or printing process.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, touch Copy It.

Copying using the ADF

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It

Copying using the scanner glass

1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It

3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next Page.
4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.

Copying film photos

1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content > Photo > √ > Photo/Film > √ > Copy It > Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job

Copying on specialty media

Copying on transparencies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > √

4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder Size.
5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6 From the home screen, navigate to:

√ > select the desired size of the transparencies > Manual Feeder Type > √ > Copy It

Copying on letterhead

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder

4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
5 Select the size of the letterhead.
6 Navigate to:

Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It

Customizing copy settings

Copying in black and white

Copy > Allow color copies > Off > √ > Submit

Copying to a different size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document > √.
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy > √.

Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.

6 Touch Copy It.

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to

4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.

Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes

Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the "Copy to" and "Copy from" settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (sch as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Auto Size Sense > √ > Copy to > Auto Size Match > √ > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > √ > Copy to > Letter > √ > Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size loaded in the printer.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 On the home screen, touch Copy.

4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.

The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.

For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.

5 Touch √, and then Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

To reduce or enlarge a copy:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 On the home screen, touch Copy.

4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.

Touching "Copy to" or "Copy from" after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Content

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:

Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

5 Touch .√

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:

Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch √ > Copy It.

Collating copies

If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).

Collated Not collated

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Collated Not collated - 1

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Collated Not collated - 2

By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off > √ > Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets

Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off, then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.

4 Select one of the following:

•Between Copies
- Between Jobs
- Between Pages
•None

5 Touch √, and then Copy It.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.

Notes:

•The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•The Copy Size must be set to 100%.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output > √ > Copy It

Creating a custom copy job (job build)

The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters.

The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.

For example:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It

When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.

Note: If required, change the job settings.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Placing information on copies

Placing the date and time at the top of each page

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer

4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.

5 Touch Yes or No > √ > Copy It.

Placing an overlay message on each page

An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft. To place a message on the copies:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > √.

4 Touch Copy It.

Canceling a copy job

Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF

When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.

A "Canceling scan job" screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass

Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.

A "Canceling scan job" screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed

1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

Understanding the copy screens and options

Copy from

This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy.

Touch a paper size button to select it as the "Copy from" setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
When "Copy from" is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
When "Copy from" is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.

Copy to

This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.

Touch a paper size button to select it as the "Copy to" setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting displayed.
If the size settings for "Copy from" and "Copy to" are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder, and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.
When "Copy to" is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.

Copies

This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.

Scale

This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can also be set for you automatically.

When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the "Copy from" and "Copy to" paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy.
Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.

Darkness

This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)

Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.

Collate

This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2) (3,3,3).

Content

This option tells the printer the original document type and source.

Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphic.

Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press or Other.

• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White—Use when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
- Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
- Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Color

This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Advanced Options

Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, ADF Skew Fix, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, and Advanced Duplex settings.

- Paper Saver—This lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.

- ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.

- Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you copy the document.

- Custom Job—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job

- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.

- Margin Shift—This lets you increase the size of the margin a specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.

- Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

- Header/Footer—This allows you to turn on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location.

- Overlay—This lets you create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the "Enter custom text" field. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.

Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a button with an icon of that overlay will be available.

- Advanced Duplex—This lets you control whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents have, and how your documents are bound.

Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.

Save As Shortcut

This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.

E-mailing

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 1

text_image

Diagram showing printer printing a document with a red arrow indicating a person's identity, alongside a document labeled 'Person' in the image.

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a person icon and a red arrow indicating direction, likely illustrating a scanning or printing process.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Getting ready to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings.

3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.

4 Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.

5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.

6 Click Submit.

Configuring e-mail settings

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings.

3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.

Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).

5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.

If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient > type an e-mail address

To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient's e-mail address.

2 Touch

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen - 1

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.

If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

E-mailing a document

Sending an e-mail using the touch screen

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch E-mail > Recipient.
4 Enter the e-mail address, or press # and then enter the shortcut number.

To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.

Note: You can also enter an e-mail address using the address book. For more information, see "Using the address book" on page 116.

5 Touch Done > Email It.

Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch √.

To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.

4 Touch E-mail It.

Using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail >Recipient(s) > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts

4 Touch the name of the recipients.

To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings

Adding e-mail subject and message information

Changing the output file type

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

E-mail > Recipient > type an e-mail address > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.

PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs.
XPS—Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third-party standalone viewer.

5 Touch E-mail It.

Note: If you selected Secure PDF, you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail

When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears.
When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears or while Scan the Next Page/Finish the Job appears.

Understanding e-mail options

Recipients

This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e-mail addresses.

Subject

This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.

Message

This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name

This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size

This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.

Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your new setting displayed.
When "Original Size" is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
When "Original Size" is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.

Resolution

Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.

Color

This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.

Content

This option tells the printer the original document type and source.

Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphic.

Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press or Other.

Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Black/White—Use when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.
Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Darkness

This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Send As

This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.

PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer

Page Setup

This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation.
Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Scan Preview

This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options

Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Edge Erase, and Transmission Log settings.

ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you e-mail the document.
Custom Job—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job
Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log

Faxing

Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.

ADF Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.	Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Getting the printer ready to fax

The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.

Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Getting the printer ready to fax - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Getting the printer ready to fax - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a device with a prohibition symbol and a close-up of its internal components, indicating no protection or disapproval.

Faxing

Initial fax setup

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual).

To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.

Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start-up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:

Fax Name or Station Name

Fax Number or Station Number

1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5 Click Submit.

Choosing a fax connection

You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.

Notes:

- The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other equipment (such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the setup steps.

- If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.

- You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes.

Equipment and service options Fax connection setup
Connect directly to the telephone line See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 110.
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service	See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 110.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) system	See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 111.
Use a Distinctive Ring service	See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 112.
Connect through an adapter used in your area	See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on page 112.

Connecting to an analog telephone line

If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Connecting to an analog telephone line - 1

natural_image

Diagram of an electronic device with a cable inserted into a socket, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

Connecting to a DSL service

If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.

Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.

3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Connecting to a DSL service - 1

text_image

Diagram showing connection of a device with labeled components: cable, connector, and power outlet

Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system

If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.

Notes:

- Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.

- Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.

- When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.

- When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.

- For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX system.

Connecting to a distinctive ring service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Connecting to a distinctive ring service - 1

natural_image

Diagram of an electronic device with a cable inserted into a socket, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:

Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.

Connecting to an adapter for your country or region

The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack:

Country/Region

•Austria	•New Zealand
•Cyprus	•Netherlands
•Denmark	•Norway
•Finland	•Portugal
•France	•Sweden
•Germany	•Switzerland
•Ireland	•United Kingdom
•Italy

For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack.

Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Connecting to an adapter for your country or region - 1

natural_image

Diagram showing a printer connected to a wall-mounted switch, with an inset close-up of the cable (no text or symbols present)

Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.

5 Click Submit.

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may have to reset the date and time.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.

4 Click Submit.

Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.

3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Sending a fax

Sending a fax using the touch screen

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, touch Fax.

4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.

To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.

Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press ⑪. The dial pause appears as a comma in the "Fax to" box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer

Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs.

Note: In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer.

1 From your software program, click File > Print.
2 From the Print window, select your printer, and then click Properties > Other Options > Fax > OK > OK.

3 On the Fax screen, enter the name and number of the fax recipient.
4 Click Send.

Creating shortcuts

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.

To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.

Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

4 Assign a shortcut number.

If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number

To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

4 Navigate to:

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen - 1

enter a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It

Using shortcuts and the address book

Using fax shortcuts

Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

Using the address book

The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.

Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > 📁 > Browse shortcuts

4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.

Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.

5 Touch Done > Fax It.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.

5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send

Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue.

4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.

The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is unavailable.

5 Touch Fax It.

Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Viewing a fax log

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.

Notes:

This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.

Canceling an outgoing fax

Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning

When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears.
When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears or while Scan the Next Page/Finish the Job appears.

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory

1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.

The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.

Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.

The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Understanding fax options

Content

This option tells the printer the original document type and source.

Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphic.

Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press or Other.

Resolution

This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.

•Standard—Suitable for most documents
•Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
- Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
- Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos

Darkness

This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.

Color

This option enables or disables color in faxing.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation.
Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Scan Preview

This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options

Touching this button lets you change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Edge Erase and ADF Skew Fix settings.

Delayed Send—This lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on.
Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.
Custom Job (Job Build)—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Holding and forwarding faxes

Holding faxes

This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.

3 In the Print Faxes Password field, enter a password.

4 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:

•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled

5 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:

a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.

c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.

6 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax

This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.

3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:

- Print
- Print and Forward
- Forward

4 From the "Forward to" menu, select one of the following:

- Fax
- E-mail
- FTP
- LDSS
- eSF

5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.

Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the "Forward to" menu.

6 Click Submit.

Scanning to an FTP address

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 1

text_image

Diagram showing printer printing a document with a red arrow indicating a person's identity, alongside a document labeled 'Person' in the image.

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a person icon and a red arrow indicating direction, likely illustrating a scanning or printing process.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.

Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number. An FTP destination could also be another printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Press, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.

Scanning to an FTP address using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > FTP > ▲ > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Done

Creating shortcuts

Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings.

3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.

4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information.
6 Enter a shortcut number.

If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

7 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

FTP > type the FTP address > ▲ > enter a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

3 Touch Submit.

Understanding FTP options

FTP

This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.

Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy · yyy · yyy · yyy).

File Name

This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.

Original Size

This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.

Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new setting displayed.
When "Original Size" is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
When "Original Size" is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.

Send As

This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.

PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer

Color

This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Resolution

This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

Sides (Duplex)—Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.
Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation.
Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.

Content

This option tells the printer the original document type and source.

Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphic.

Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press or Other.

Scan Preview

This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options

Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:

Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output settings before you send the document.
Custom Job (Job Build)—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scan Preview—This lets you display the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 1

text_image

Diagram showing printer printing a document with a red arrow and icon of a person, likely illustrating a print or documentation process.

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ADF Scanner glass - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a person icon and a red arrow indicating direction, likely illustrating a scanning or printing process.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Scan Profile > Create.

3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
5 Enter a scan name.

The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

6 Click Submit.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.

A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.

a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

c Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and then touch Profiles.
d After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.

8 Return to the computer to view the file.

The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.

Scanning to a flash drive

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.

The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Adjust the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.

Understanding the Scan Center features

The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.

The following features are available:

Scan and send images to your computer
Convert scanned images to text
Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast
•Make larger scans without losing detail
Scan two-sided documents

Using the ScanBack Utility

You can use the Lexmark ScanBack™ Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan-to-PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility is on the Software and Documentation CD.

1 Set up your scan-to-PC profile:

a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer you want to use.

If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person to obtain a list, or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name.

c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create.

d Make sure to select:

• Show MFP Instructions—if you want to view or print the final directions.
- Create Shortcut—if you want to save this group of settings to use again.

e Click Finish.

A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.

2 Scan your original documents:

a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:

Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit

Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding scan profile options

Original Size

This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).

Resolution

Color

This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Content

This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Graphics, Text/Photo, or Photo.

Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphic.

Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.

Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.

Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Darkness

This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Page Setup

This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

Sides (Duplex)—Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation.
Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge of the page.

Scan Preview

This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options

Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:

ADF Skew Fix— Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Advanced Imaging—Use this to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature before scanning a document.
Custom Job—Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.
Edge Erase—Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.
Transmission Log—Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log.

Understanding printer menus

Menus list

Supplies Paper Menu Reports Settings

Replace Supply	Default Source	Menu Settings Page	General Settings
Cyan Cartridge	Paper Size/Type	Device Statistics	Copy Settings
Magenta Cartridge	Configure MP	Network Setup Page	Fax Settings
Yellow Cartridge	Substitute Size	Network [x] Setup Page	E-mail Settings
Black Cartridge	Paper Texture	Shortcut List	FTP Settings
Separator Roll and Pick Assembly	Paper Weight	Fax Job Log	Flash Drive Menu
Waste Toner Bottle	Paper Loading	Fax Call Log	Print Settings
Fuser	Custom Types	Copy Shortcuts
Transfer Module	Custom Names	E-mail Shortcuts
Staple Cartridge	Custom Scan Sizes	Fax Shortcuts
Hole Punch Box	Custom Bin Names	FTP Shortcuts
	Universal Setup	Profiles List
	Bin Setup	Print Fonts
		Print Directory
		Asset Report

Security Network/Ports Help Manage Shortcuts

Edit Security Setups	Active NIC	Print All Guides	Fax Shortcuts
Miscellaneous Security Settings	Network^1	Copy Guide	E-mail Shortcuts
Confidential Print	Standard USB	E-mail Guide	FTP Shortcuts
Disk Wiping	Parallel [x]	Fax Guide	Copy Shortcuts
Security Audit Log	Serial [x]	FTP Guide	Profile Shortcuts
Set Date and Time	SMTP Setup	Print Defects GuideInformation GuideSupplies Guide

A list of installed DLEs (Download Emulators) appears. ^2

^1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
^2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

Supplies menu

Menu item Description
Replace Supply Separator Roll and Pick Assembly Yes No	Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the separator pad Select Yes to reset the supply counter. Select No to exit.
Cyan Cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported	Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge
Magenta Cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported	Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge
Yellow Cartridge Cartridge Nearly Low Cartridge Low Cartridge Very Low Cartridge Critically Low Invalid Replace Missing or Defective OK Unsupported	Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge
Black CartridgeCartridge Nearly LowCartridge LowCartridge Very LowCartridge Critically LowInvalidReplaceMissing or DefectiveOKUnsupported	Shows the status of the black toner cartridge
Separator Roll and Pick AssemblyOKReplace	Shows the status of the Separator Roll and Pick Assembly
Waste Toner BottleNear FullReplaceMissingOK	Shows the status of the waste toner bottle
FuserEarly WarningLowReplaceMissingOK	Shows the status of the fuser
Transfer ModuleEarly WarningLowReplaceMissingOK	Shows the status of the transfer module
Staple CartridgeEarly WarningLowReplaceMissingOK	Shows the status of the staple cartridge
Hole Punch BoxNear FullReplaceMissingOK	Shows the status of the hole punch box

Menu item Description

Default SourceTray [x]MP FeederManual PaperManual Envelope

Sets a default paper source for all print jobsNotes:Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu setting.If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.

Menu item Description
Tray [x] SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (México)FolioStatementUniversalA4A5JIS B5	Specifies the paper size loaded in each trayNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the hardware appears.If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job uses the linked tray.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Tray [x] TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyHeavy GlossyLabelsVinyl LabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/Cotton PaperCustom Type [x]	Specifies the type of paper loaded in each trayNotes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.
MP Feeder SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (México)FolioStatementUniversal7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther EnvelopeA4A5A6JIS B5	Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feederNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
MP Feeder TypeCustom Type [x]Plain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyHeavy GlossyLabelsVinyl LabelsBondEnvelopeRough EnvelopeLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/Cotton Paper	Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feederNotes:Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item.
Manual Paper SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (México)FolioStatementUniversalA4A5A6JIS B5	Specifies the size of the paper being manually loadedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Note:Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Manual Paper TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyHeavy GlossyLabelsVinyl LabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/Cotton PaperCustom Type [x]	Specifies the type of paper being manually loadedNote: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope	Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loadedNote: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope TypeEnvelopeRough EnvelopeCustom Type [x]	Specifies the type of envelope being manually loadedNote: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

Configure MP menu

Menu item Description
Configure MPCassetteManualFirst	Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feederNotes:Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs.First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.

Substitute Size menu

Menu item Description
Substitute SizeAll ListedOffStatement/A5Letter/A4	Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not availableNotes:All Listed is the factory default setting. All available size substitutions are allowed.Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.Setting a size substitution lets a print job continue without a Change Paper message appearing.

Paper Texture menu

Menu item Description
Plain TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the plain paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loadedNotes:•Normal is the factory default setting.•Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond TextureRoughSmoothNormal	Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loadedNote: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope TextureRough	Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loadedNote: Rough is the factory default setting.
Letterhead TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton TextureRough	Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loadedNote: Rough is the factory default setting.
Custom [xl] TextureNormalRoughSmooth	Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loadedNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu

Menu item Description
Plain WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loadedNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy WeightHeavy	Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loadedNote: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Labels WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope WeightHeavyLightNormal	Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loadedNote: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Letterhead WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light WeightLight	Specifies the relative weight of the paper loadedNote: Light is the factory default setting.
Heavy WeightHeavy	Specifies the relative weight of the paper loadedNote: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] WeightNormalHeavyLight	Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loadedNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Menu item Description
Card Stock LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes:Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties.If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided print jobs.
Recycled LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Glossy LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Labels LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Bond LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Letterhead LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Preprinted LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Colored LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Light LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Heavy LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Notes: Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties.If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided print jobs.
Custom [x] LoadingOffDuplex	Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Custom [x] as the paper typeNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported.
Notes:Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties.If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided print jobs.

Custom Types menu

Menu item Description
Custom Type [x]PaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyRough/CottonLabelsVinyl LabelsEnvelope	Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type [x] name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVisionTM ProfessionalNotes:•Paper is the factory default setting.•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
RecycledPaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyRough/CottonLabelsVinyl LabelsEnvelope	Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menusNotes:•Paper is the factory default setting.•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Custom Names menu

Menu item Definition
Custom Name [x] [none]	Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom Type [x] name in the printer menus.

Menu Item Description
Standard Bin	Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin
Bin [x]	Specifies a custom name for Bin [x]

Menu item Description

Custom Scan Size [x]Scan Size NameWidth1–8.5 inches (25–215.9 mm)Height1–25 inches (25–635 mm)OrientationPortraitLandscape2 scans per sideOffOn

Specifies a custom scan size name, scan sizes and options. The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.Notes:8.5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.

These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal paper size. The Universal paper size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.

Menu item Description
Units of MeasureInchesMillimeters	Identifies the unit of measureNote: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width3–48 inches76–1219 mm	Sets the portrait widthNotes:If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. 216 mm is the international factory default setting.The width can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Portrait Height3–48 inches76–1219 mm	Sets the portrait heightNotes:If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.14 inches is the US factory default setting. 356 mm is the international factory default setting.The height can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Feed DirectionShort EdgeLong Edge	Specifies the feed directionNotes:Short Edge is the factory default setting.Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray.

Bin Setup menu

Menu Item Description
Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specifies the default output binNote: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Configure BinsMailboxLinkMail OverflowLink OptionalType Assignment	Specifies configuration options for output binsNotes:Mailbox is the factory default setting. This setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox.Link configures all available bins as one large output bin.Link Optional links together all available output bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed.Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an output bin or linked bin set.Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected.
Overflow BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specifies an alternate output bin when a designated bin is fullNote: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Assign Type/BinPlain Paper BinCard Stock BinTransparency BinRecycled BinGlossy BinHeavy Glossy BinLabels BinVinyl Labels BinBond BinEnvelope BinRough Envelope BinLetterhead BinPreprinted BinColored BinLight Paper BinHeavy Paper BinRough/Cotton BinCustom [x] Bin	Selects an output bin for each supported paper typeAvailable selections for each type are:DisabledStandard BinBin [x]Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.

Reports menu

Menu item Description
Menu Settings Page	Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information
Device Statistics	Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages
Network Setup Page	Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address informationNote: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page	Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address informationNotes:This menu item is available when there is more than one network option installed.This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Shortcut List	Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Fax Job Log Prints a report containing	information about the last 200 completed faxesNote: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log	Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked callsNote: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts	Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts	Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts
Profiles List	Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer
Print Fonts	Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer
Print Directory	Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard diskNotes:Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working.
Asset Report	Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database.

Menu item Description
Active NICAuto[list of available network cards]	Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menus

Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.

Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeAutoOff	Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]	Sets the size of the network input bufferNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.The value can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job BufferingOffOnAuto	Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PSAutoOnOff	Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network SetupReportsNetwork CardTCP/IPIPv6WirelessAppleTalk	Displays and sets the printer network settings.Note:The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network.
Network [x] SetupReportsNetwork CardTCP/IPIPv6WirelessAppleTalk

This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network Reports

Menu item Description
Print Setup Page	Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address

This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card

Menu item Description
View Card StatusConnectedDisconnected	Lets you view the connection status of the network card
View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card
View Network AddressUAA LAA	Lets you view the network addresses
End-of-Job Timeout0–255	Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled.Notes:90 seconds is the factory default setting.A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Banner PageOffOn	Allows the printer to print a banner page.Note: Off is the factory default setting.

This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP

Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.

Menu item Description
ActivateOnOff	Activates TCP/IPNote: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP/IP hostnameNote: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address	Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP addressNote: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask	Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP netmask
Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP gateway
Enable DHCPOnOff	Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment settingNote: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARPOnOff	Specifies the RARP address assignment settingNote: On is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTPOnOff	Specifies the BOOTP address assignment settingNote: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIPYesNo	Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTPYesNo	Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using File Transfer Protocol.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP ServerYesNo	Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address	Lets you view or change the current WINS server address
Enable DDNSYesNo	Lets you view or change the current DDNS settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNSYesNo	Lets you view or change the current mDNS settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address
Enable HTTPSYesNo	Lets you view or change the current HTTPS settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting.

This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6

Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.

Menu item Description
Enable IPv6OnOff	Enables IPv6 in the printerNote: On is the factory default setting.
Auto ConfigurationOnOff	Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a routerNote: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname	Lets you set the hostnameNote: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6OnOff	Enables DHCPv6 in the printerNote: On is the factory default setting.

Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.

Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.

The Wireless menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Wireless

Menu item Description
WPS PBC Mode	Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point (wireless router) within a given period of time
WPS PIN Mode	Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point
WPS Auto DetectDisableEnable	Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with WPS uses— WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) or WPS Personal Identification Number (PIN)Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network ModeAd hocInfrastructure	Specifies the network modeNotes:•Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.•Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point.
Compatibility802.11b/g/n802.11n802.11b/g	Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless networkNote: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network[list of available networks]	Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
View Signal Quality	Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection
View Security Mode Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses

Note: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi-Fi technology. It is no longer necessary to configure the network name (SSID) and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices.

This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:

Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk

Menu item Description
ActivateYesNo	Activates AppleTalk supportNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk nameNote: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk addressNote: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Set Zone [default][list of zones available on the network]	Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the networkNote: When “default” is selected, the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the router identifies as the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists, then the zone marked with an * is the default setting.

Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeAutoOnOff	Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
USB BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]Disabled	Sets the size of the USB input bufferNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job BufferingOffOnAuto	Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printingNotes:Off is the factory default setting.On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PSAutoOnOff	Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Addressyyy.yyy.yyy.yyy	Sets the network address information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmaskyyy.yyy.yyy.yyy	Sets the netmask information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA Gatewayyyy.yyy.yyy.yyy	Sets the gateway information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Parallel [x] menu

Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeAutoOnOff	Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]Disabled	Sets the size of the parallel input bufferNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job BufferingOffOnAuto	Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printingNotes:Off is the factory default setting.On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced StatusOnOff	Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel portNotes:On is the factory default setting.Off disables parallel port negotiation.
ProtocolFastbytesStandard	Specifies the parallel port protocolNotes:Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor InitOffOn	Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computerNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2OnOff	Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobeNote: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PSAutoOnOff	Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Addressyyy.yyy.yyy.yyy	Sets the network address information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmaskyyy.yyy.yyy.yyy	Sets the netmask information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA gatewayyyy.yyy.yyy.yyy	Sets the gateway information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Serial [x] menu

Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOff	Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeAutoOnOff	Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]Disabled	Sets the size of the serial input bufferNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job BufferingOffOnAuto	Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printingNotes:Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk.On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
ProtocolDTRDTR/DSRXON/XOFFXON/XOFF/DTRXONXOFF/DTRDSR	Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial portNotes:DTR is the factory default setting.DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings.
Robust XONOffOn	Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computerNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON/XOFF.
Baud9600192003840057600115200138200172800230400345600120024004800	Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial portNotes:9600 is the factory default setting.138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1, Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits87	Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frameNote:8 is the factory default setting.
ParityNoneIgnoreEvenOdd	Sets the parity for serial input and output data framesNote: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSROffOn	Determines whether the printer uses the DSR SignalNotes:Off is the factory default setting.DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.

SMTP Setup menu

Menu item Description
Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server	ver gateway and port informationNote: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout5-30	Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e-mailNote: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address	Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer
Use SSLDisabledNegotiateRequired	Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP serverNotes:·Disabled is the factory default setting.·When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server AuthenticationNo authentication requiredLogin/PlainCRAM-MD5Digest-MD5NTLMKerberos 5	Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail privilegesNote: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Device-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP Credentials	Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Device and User-Initiated E-mail.Device UserID and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP CredentialsUse Session User ID & PasswordUse Session E-mail address & PasswordPrompt User
Device UserID
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Menu item Description
Edit Backup Password	Creates a backup passwordNote: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks	Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN
Edit Security Templates	Adds or edits a Security Template
Edit Access Controls	Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access points

Menu item Description
Login RestrictionsLogin failuresFailure time frameLockout timePanel Login TimeoutRemote Login Timeout	Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked outNotes:“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1-10 attempts is the factory default setting.“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1-60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 1-60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1-900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1-120 seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset JumperAccess controls="No Security"No EffectReset factory security defaults	Changes the value of the security settingsNotes:Access controls="No Security" retains all the security information that the user has defined. "No Security" is the factory default setting."No Effect" means the reset has no effect on the device's security configuration."Reset factory security defaults" deletes all security information that the user has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page.
LDAP Certificate VerificationDemandTryAllowNever	Allows the user to request a server certificateNotes:“Demand" means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately. "Demand" is the factory default setting."Try" means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately."Allow" means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally."Never" means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length1-16	Limits the digit length of the PIN.Note:4 is the is the factory default setting.

Menu item Description
Max Invalid PINOff2–10	Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be enteredNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted.
Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week	Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deletedNotes:Off is the factory default setting.If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted.

Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.

Note: This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.

Menu item Description
Wiping ModeOffAutoManual	Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.Due to the large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping, activating this option may decrease printer performance, especially if the printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to service.
Manual WipingDo not start nowStart now	Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed (printed). This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job.Notes:"Do not start now" is the factory default setting.If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe.
Automatic MethodSingle passMultiple pass	Automatic wiping marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.Only Automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.Notes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method.
Manual MethodSingle passMultiple pass	Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first.Notes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.This menu item will not appear if Wiping Mode is set to “Off” or “Auto”.Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method.
Scheduled MethodSingle passMultiple pass	Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first.Notes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.This menu item will not appear if Wiping Mode is set to “Off” or “Auto”.Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method.Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message.

Security Audit Log menu

Menu item Description
Export Log	Enables an authorized user to export the audit logNotes:To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.From the Embedded Web Server, the audit log can be downloaded to a computer.
Delete LogYesNo	Specifies whether audit logs are deletedNote: “Yes” is the factory default setting.
Configure LogEnable AuditNoYesEnable Remote SyslogNoYesRemote Syslog Facility0–23Severity of events to log0–7	Specifies whether and how audit logs are createdNotes:Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default setting.Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.With the security audit log activated, the severity value of each event is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.

Set Date and Time menu

Menu item Description
Current Date and Time Lets you	view the current date and time settings for the printer
Manually Set Date and Time [input date/time]	Lets you set the date and time for the printer.Note: Date and time are set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.
Time Zone[list of time zones]	Lets you set the time zone for the printer.Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DSTOnOff	Enables Daylight Saving Time associated with the set time zone.Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Time ZoneUTC OffsetDST Start WeekDST Start DayDST Start MonthDST Start TimeDST End WeekDST End DayDST End MonthDST End TimeDST Offset	Sets a custom time zone.
Enable NTPOnOff	Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a networkNotes:•On is the factory default setting.•Use this recommended date and time setting.

General Settings menu

Menu item Description
Display LanguageEnglishFrancaisDeutschItalianoEspanolGreekDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaPortugueseSuomiRussianPolskiMagyarTurkceCeskySimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseKoreanJapanese	Sets the language of the text appearing on the displayNote:All languages may not be available for all printers.
Eco-ModeOffEnergyEnergy/PaperPaper	Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty mediaNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its factory default settings.Energy minimizes the power used by the printer. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
ADF Loaded BeepEnabledDisabled	Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loadedNote:Enabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet ModeOffOn	Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printerNotes:Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer.On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line graphics.For optimal printing of color-rich documents, set Quiet Mode to Off.SelectingPhotofrom the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing.
Run Initial setupYesNo	Instructs the printer to run the setup wizardNotes:Yes is the factory default setting.After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen, the default becomes No.
KeyboardKeyboard TypeEnglishFrancaisFrancais CanadienDeutschItalianoEspanolGreekDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaSuomiPortugueseRussianPolskiSwiss GermanSwiss FrenchKoreanMagyarTurkishCzechSimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseJapaneseCustom Key [x]	Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard.
Paper SizesUSMetric	Notes:US is the factory default setting.Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.Changing this setting also changes the Units of Measurement setting in the Universal Setup menu and the default for each input source in the Paper Size/Paper Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range[port range]	Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.Note:9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Displayed InformationLeft sideRight sideCustom Text [x]	Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screenFor the Left side and Right side options, choose from the following options:NoneIP AddressHostnameContact NameLocationDate/Time mDNS/DDNS Service NameZero Configuration NameCustom Text [x]Model NameNotes:IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)Paper JamLoad PaperService Errors	Lets you customize the displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service ErrorsChoose from the following options:DisplayNoYesMessage to DisplayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:No is the factory default setting for Display.Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.
Home screen customizationChange LanguageCopyCopy shortcutsFaxFax ShortcutsE-mailE-mail ShortcutsFTPFTP ShortcutsSearch Held JobsHeld JobsUSB DriveProfilesBookmarksJobs by user	Lets you change the buttons that appear on the home screenAvailable selections for each button are:Do not displayDisplay
Date FormatMM-DD-YYYYDD-MM-YYYYYYYY-MM-DD	Formats the printer date
Time Format12 hour A.M./P.M.24 hour clock	Formats the printer time
Screen Brightness20–100	Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen
One Page CopyOffOn	Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a timeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Output LightingNormal/Standby ModeOffDimBright	Sets the amount of light from the standard binNotes:If Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, the factory default setting is Dim.if Eco-Mode is Off or set to Paper, the factory default setting is Bright.
Output LightingSleep ModeOffDimBright	Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional output binNotes:If Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, the factory default setting is Off.If Eco-Mode is Off or set to Paper, the factory default setting is Dim.
Audio FeedbackButton FeedbackOnOffVolume1–10	Notes:On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Tactile Touchscreen FeedbackOnOff	Specifies whether the operator panel provides touch sensation feedback
Show BookmarksYesNo	Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs areaNote: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected, bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background RemovalOnOff	Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USBNote: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed.
Allow Custom Job ScansOnOff	Lets you scan multiple jobs to one fileNote: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam RecoveryJob levelPage level	Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADFNotes:If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate30–300	Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshesNote:120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer	Note:The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location	Specifies the location of the printerNote:The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
AlarmsAlarm ControlCartridge AlarmStaple Alarm	Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator interventionAvailable selections for each alarm type are:OffSingleContinuousNotes:Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single sounds three quick beeps.Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. Off means no alarm will sound.Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
TimeoutsStandby Mode1–240Disabled	Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system enters a lower power stateNote:15 minutes is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsSleep Mode1–240 minDisabled	Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power stateNotes:30 minutes is the factory default setting.Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm-up times.Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm-up time.
TimeoutsScreen Timeout15-300 sec	Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to a Ready stateNote: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsPrint TimeoutDisabled1-255 sec	Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print jobNotes:90 seconds is the factory default setting.When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsWait Timeout15-65535 secDisabled	Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print jobNotes:40 seconds is the factory default setting.Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsJob Hold Timeout5-255 sec	Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queueNotes:30 seconds is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Print RecoveryAuto ContinueDisabled5-255	Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time periodNote: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print RecoveryJam RecoveryAutoOnOff	Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pagesNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print RecoveryPage ProtectOffOn	Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwiseNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Press Sleep ButtonSleepHibernateDo nothing	Determines how the scanner, while in Idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep buttonNote: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep ButtonDo nothingSleepHibernate	Determines how the scanner, while in Idle state, reacts to a long press of the Sleep buttonNote: Do nothing is the factory default setting.
Factory DefaultsDo Not RestoreRestore Now	Returns the printer settings to the factory default settingsNotes:Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the user-defined settings.Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.

Copy Settings menu

Menu item Description
Content TypeText/PhotoTextGraphicsPhoto	Specifies the type of content contained in the copy jobNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.• Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.• Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.• Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image.
Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther	Specifies the source of content in the copy jobNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
ColorOnOff	Specifies whether or not copies are printed in colorNote: On is the factory default setting.
Allow color copiesOnOff	Lets you enable or disable color in copyingNotes:•On is the factory default setting.•Setting this to Off will hide all color-specific menus.•This setting overrides the Color setting.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided to 1 sided1 sided to 2 sided2 sided to 1 sided2 sided to 2 sided	Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (one-sided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplexNotes:•1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side and the copied page will also have printing on one side.•1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side while the copied page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original document is six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.•2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides while the copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.•2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides and the copy mimics the original exactly.
Paper SaverOff2 on 1 Portrait2 on 1 Landscape4 on 1 Portrait4 on 1 Landscape	Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one pageNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page BordersOffOn	Specifies whether or not a border is printed around the edge of the pageNote: Off is the factory default setting.
CollateOn [1,2,1,2,1,2]Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]	Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copiesNote: On is the factory default setting.
PunchOff2 holes3 holes4 holes	Determines the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy jobNote: Off is the factory default setting.
StapleOffOn	Lets you enable or disable the staple finisherNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardID CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes	Specifies the paper size of the original documentNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting.A4 is the international factory default setting.
Copy To SourceTray [x]Auto Size MatchManual Feeder	Specifies the paper source for copy jobsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency SeparatorsOnOff	Places a sheet of paper between transparenciesNote: On is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsNoneBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobsNote: None is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specifies the separator sheet sourceNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Specifies the level of darkness for the copy jobNote: 5 is the factory default setting.
Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy jobNotes:•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.•Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed.
Number of Copies1-999	Specifies the number of copies for the copy jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting.
Header/FooterTop leftTop leftOffDate/TimePage numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the pageNotes:•Off is the factory default setting for Top left.•All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Header/FooterTop middleTop middleOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the pageNotes:•Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.•All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Header/FooterTop rightTop rightOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Top right.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Header/FooterBottom leftBottom leftOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Header/FooterBottom middleBottom middleOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Header/FooterBottom rightBottom rightOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text	Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
OverlayOffConfidentialCopyDraftUrgentCustom	Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy jobNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay	Specifies the custom overlay textNote: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copiesOnOff	Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or documentNote: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOffOn	Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizesNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcutsNote: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto CenterOffOn	Lets you automatically center the content on the pageNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
ContrastBest for content0-5	Specifies the contrast used for the copy jobNote: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixOffOn	Lets you fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copyNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enables the user to specify "warm" or "cool" outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default, while "warm" values generate a redder output than the default.
Sample CopyOffOn	Creates a sample copy of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.

Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.

General Fax Settings

Menu item Description
Fax Name or Station Name	Specifies the name of the fax in the printer
Fax Number or Station Number	Specifies a number associated with the fax
Station IDFax Name or Station NameFax Number or Station Number	Specifies how the fax is identified
Enable Manual FaxOffOn	Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handsetNotes:Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory UseEqualMostly sentAll sendAll receiveMostly receive	Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobsNotes:Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel FaxesAllowDon't Allow	Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs
Caller IDOnOffAlternate	Specifies type of caller ID being used
Fax number maskingOffFrom leftFrom right	Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax numberNote:The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask” setting.
Digits to mask0–58	Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number
Fax Cover Page	Configures the fax cover pageNote: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to field
On
Off
Include from field
Off
On
From
Include Message field
Off
On
Message
Include Logo
Off
On
Include Footer [x]
Footer [x]

Fax Send Settings

Menu item Description
ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpiUltra Fine 600 dpi	Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Original SizeMixed SizesLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size Sense	Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNote: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content TypeTextText/PhotoGraphicsPhoto	Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for faxingNotes:Text is the factory default setting. Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image.
Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther	Specifies how the output is producedNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness1-9	Lightens or darkens the outputNote:5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix	Lets you enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix RulesPrefix Rule [x]	Establishes a dialing prefix rule
Automatic Redial0-9	Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified numberNote:5 is the factory default setting.
Redial Frequency1-200	Specifies the number of minutes between redials
Behind a PABXNoYes	Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone
Enable ECMYesNo	Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs
Enable Fax ScansOnOff	Lets you fax files that are scanned at the computer
Driver to faxYesNo	Allows the driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer
Dial ModeTonePulse	Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse
Max Speed2400480096001440033600	Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent
Custom Job scanningOffOn	Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file
Scan PreviewOffOn	Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
ContrastBest for content0-5	Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a faxNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixOffOn	Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxingNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness0-5	Adjusts the sharpness of a faxNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enables the user to specify "warm" or "cool" outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while "warm" values generate a redder output than the default.
Enable Color Fax ScansOff by defaultOn by defaultNever useAlways use	Enables color faxingNote: "Off by default" is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono FaxesOnOff	Converts all outgoing faxes to black and whiteNote: On is the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings

Menu item Description
Enable Fax ReceiveOnOff	Allows fax jobs to be received by the printerNote: On is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer1–25	Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting.
Auto ReductionOnOff	Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax sourceNote: On is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceAutoTray [x]Multi-Purpose Feeder	Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax
Output BinStandard BinBin 1[x]	Specifies an output bin for received faxesNote: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed.
Sides (Duplex)OffOn	Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs
Separator SheetsNoneBefore JobAfter Job	Enables the printer to include separator sheets in the output
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet
Fax FooterOffOn	Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received faxNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed3360024004800960014400	Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received
Fax ForwardingPrintPrint and ForwardForward	Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient
Forward toFaxE-mailFTPLDSSeSF	Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwardedNote: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut	Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF)
Block No Name FaxOffOn	Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified
Banned Fax List	Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer
Holding FaxesHeld Fax ModeOffAlways OnManualScheduledFax Holding Schedule	Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set scheduleNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax ReceiveOnOff	Enables the device to receive fax in color

Fax Log Settings

Menu item Description
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job
Receive Error LogPrint NeverPrint on Error	Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error
Auto Print LogsOnOff	Enables automatic printing of fax logsNote: Logs print after every 200 jobs.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs
Logs DisplayRemote Fax Name or RemoteStation NameDialed Number	Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned
Enable Job LogOnOff	Enables access to the Fax Job log
Enable Call LogOnOff	Enables access to the Fax Call log
Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed

Speaker Settings

Menu item Description
Speaker ModeOn until ConnectedAlways OnAlways Off	Specifies the mode of the speaker.Notes:“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.Always On turns the speaker on.Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker VolumeHighLow	Controls the volume settingNote: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer VolumeOnOff	Controls the fax speaker ringer volumeNote: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On

Menu item Description
All RingsSingle Ring OnlyDouble Ring OnlyTriple Ring OnlySingle or Double Rings OnlySingle or Triple Rings OnlyDouble or Triple Rings Only	Specifies ring patterns when device is answering callsNote: All Rings is the factory default setting.

Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.

Fax Server Setup

Menu item Description
To Format	Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information
Primary SMTP Gateway	Specifies SMTP server port information
Secondary SMTP Gateway	Specifies SMTP server port information
Image FormatPDF (.pdf)XPS (.xps)TIFF (.tif)	Specifies the image type for scan to fax
Content TypeTextText/PhotoGraphicsPhoto	Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to faxNotes:Text is the factory default setting. Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image.
Content SourceColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther	Specifies how content will be producedNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film• Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Fax ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpiUltra Fine 600 dpi	Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax
Darkness1-9	Lightens or darkens the outputNote:5 factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes	Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog ReceiveOffOn	Enables analog fax receiveNote: Off is the factory default setting.

E-mail Settings menu

Menu item Description
E-mail Server SetupSubjectMessageBase file name	Specifies e-mail server informationNotes:•The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters.•The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
E-mail Server SetupSend me a copyNever appearsOn by defaultOff by defaultAlways On	Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the senderNote:“Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E-mail Server SetupMax E-mail size0–65535 KB	Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytesNote:E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E-mail Server SetupSize error message	Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit
E-mail Server SetupLimit destinations	Specifies a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e-mail destinations to that domain name onlyNotes:•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.•The limit is one domain.
E-mail Server SetupWeb Link SetupServerLoginPasswordPathBase file nameWeb Link	Defines the e-mail server path name; for example: /directory/pathNote:The characters * : ? < > \| are invalid entries for a path name.
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specifies the format of the scanned fileNote:PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.51.6A-1a1.21.31.4	Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e-mailingNote:1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeText/PhotoPhotoTextGraphics	Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for e-mailingNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.•Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.•Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image.
Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther	Specifies the source of the document being scannedNotes:• Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Color	Specifies whether or not a job prints in grayscale or color
Color	Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Gray	Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Resolution	Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch
150	Note: 150 is the factory default setting.
200
300
400
600
75
Darkness	Lightens or darkens the output
1-9	Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation	Specifies the orientation of the scanned image
Portrait	Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape	Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size	Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned
Letter	Notes:
Legal	•A4 is the international factory default setting.
Executive	•Letter is the US factory default setting.
Folio
Statement
Universal
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Business Card
Custom Scan Size [x]
A4
A5
Oficio (Mexico)
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Book Original
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
Sides (Duplex)	Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Off	Notes:
Long edge	•Off is the factory default setting.
Short edge	•Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
	•Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for Content5-90	Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the imageNotes:“Best for content” is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:50 is the factory default setting.
E-mail images sent asAttachmentWeb Link	Specifies how the images will be sentNote:Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Specifies whether or not the transmission log printsNote:Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specifies the paper source for printing e-mail logsNote:Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specifies an exit bin for e-mail logsNotes:Standard Bin is the factory default setting.Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed.
E-mail Bit Depth8 bit1 bit	Enables the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote:8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanningOffOn	Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizesNote:Off is the factory default setting.
Scan PreviewOffOn	Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobsNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcutsNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail Destination screen.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
ContrastBest for content0-5	Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixOffOn	Corrects slight skew in the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. “Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.
Use cc:/bcc:OffOn	Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fieldsNote: Off is the factory default setting.

FTP Settings menu

Menu item Description
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDF (.pdf)TIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specifies the format of the FTP fileNote: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.51.6A-1a1.21.31.4	Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTPNote: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto	Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTPNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.•Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.•Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image.
Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther	Specifies how content will be producedNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
ColorColorGray	Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or colorNote: Color is the factory default setting.
Resolution15020030040060075	Specifies how many dots per inch are scannedNote: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Lightens or darkens the outputNote: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specifies the orientation of the scanned imageNote: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes	Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNotes:A4 is the international factory default setting.Letter is the US factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for Content5-90	Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNotes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error	Specifies whether the transmission log printsNote: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specifies a paper source for FTP logsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x]	Specifies an exit bin for FTP logsNotes:Standard Bin is the factory default setting.Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed.
FTP bit Depth8 bit1 bit	Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Base File NameLets you enter a base file name	base file nameNote: There is an image limitation of 53 characters.
Custom Job ScanningOffOn	Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single jobNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan PreviewOffOn	Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobsNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff	Enables shortcut creation for FTP addressesNote: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enables an equal balance of colors in the output
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast0-5Best for content	Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: "Best for content" is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixOffOn	Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enables the user to specify "warm" or "cool" outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while "warm" values generate a redder output than the default.

Scan Settings

Menu item Description
FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps)	Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTPNote: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2–1.6A-1a	Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTPNote: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content TypeText/PhotoPhotoTextGraphics	Specifies the type of content that will be scanned through FTPNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.•Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.•Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image.
Content SourceColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOtherBlack and White Laser	Specifies the source of content in the scan jobNotes:• Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film• Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
ColorGrayColor	Specifies whether prints are in grayscale or colorNote: Gray is the factory default setting.
Resolution15020030040060075	Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi)Note: 150 is the factory default setting.
Darkness1-9	Lightens or darkens the outputNote: 5 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Specifies the orientation of the scanned imageNote: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveTabloidFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A3A4A5Oficio (Mexico)JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes	Specifies the paper size of the documentNote: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge	Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG QualityBest for content5-90	Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and qualityNotes:“Best for content” is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Text Default5-90	Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default5-90	Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the qualityNote:75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default5-90	Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the qualityNote:50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff	Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth8 bit1 bit	Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote:8 bit is the factory default setting.
File NameLets you enter a base file name	Note:A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job ScanningOffOn	Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy jobNote:Off is the factory default setting.
Scan PreviewOffOn	Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobsNote:Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote:0 is the factory default setting.
Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue	Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image
Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255	Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
ContrastBest for content0-5	Specifies the contrast of the scanned imageNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror ImageOffOn	Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative ImageOffOn	Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to 4	Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
ADF Skew FixOffOn	Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting
Scan edge to edgeOffOn	Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5	Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature-4 to 4	Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. “Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default.

Print Settings

Copies1–999	Specifies a default number of copies for each print jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceTray [x]Manual PaperMP FeederManual Envelope	Sets a default paper source for all print jobsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
ColorColorBlack Only	Generates color print jobs outputNote: Color is the factory default setting.
CollateOn (1,2,1,2,1,2)Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)	Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copiesNote: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided	Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the pageNote: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge	Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the pageNotes:Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait	Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page documentNote: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape
Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up	Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a paperNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid	Prints a border around each page imageNote: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical	Specifies the positioning of multiple-page imagesNotes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Separator SheetsNoneBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Specifies whether blank separator sheets are insertedNotes:None is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes.
Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specifies the paper source for separator sheetsNotes:Tray 1 is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Multipurpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint	Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print jobNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Print Settings

Setup menu

Menu item Description
Printer LanguagePS EmulationPCL Emulation	Sets the default printer languageNotes:PS Emulation is the factory default setting. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs.Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job WaitingOffOn	Specifies if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only if a non-read-only printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print AreaNormalFit to PageWhole Page	Sets the logical and physical printable areaNotes:Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size.Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Black Only ModeOffOn	Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print cartridgeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Download TargetRAMFlashDisk	Sets the storage location for downloadsNotes:RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.This menu item appears only if a flash and/or disk option is installed.
Resource SaveOffOn	Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is availableNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, 38 Memory Full appears, but downloads are not deleted.
Print All OrderAlphabeticalOldest FirstNewest First	Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selectedNotes:Alphabetical is the factory default setting.Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel.

Finishing menu

Menu item Description
Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided	Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobsNotes:1 sided is the factory default setting.You can set 2-sided printing from the software program. For Windows users, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop-up menus.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge	Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the pageNotes:Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies1-999	Specifies the default number of copies for each print jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint	Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print jobNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
CollateOff (1,1,1,2,2,2)On (1,2,1,2,1,2)	Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copiesNotes:Off is the factory default setting.On stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator SheetsNoneBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages	Specifies whether blank separator sheets are insertedNotes:None is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document.
Separator SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder	Specifies the paper source for separator sheetsNotes:Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Multi-Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up	Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a paperNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical	Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using Paper SaverNotes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait	Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page documentNote:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid	Prints a border around each page image when using Paper SaverNote:None is the factory default setting.
Staple JobOffOn	Specifies whether printed output is stapledNote:This menu item only appears if the printer is equipped with a stapler.
Hole PunchOffOn	Specifies whether printed output has punched holesNote:This menu item only appears if the printer is equipped with a puncher.
Hole Punch Mode2 holes3 holes4 holes	Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a printed outputNotes:3 holes is the US factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory default setting.This menu item only appears if the printer is equipped with a puncher.
Offset PagesNoneBetween CopiesBetween Jobs	Offsets pages at certain instancesNotes:None is the factory default setting.Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, each set of printed pages are offset, such as all page 1's and all page 2's.Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed.This menu item only appears if a stapler option is installed.

Quality menu

Menu item Description
Print ModeColorBlack Only	Specifies whether images are printed in color or in black and whiteNote: Color is the factory default setting.
Color CorrectionAutoOffManual	Adjusts the color output on the printed pageNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page.Off turns off color correction.Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu.Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.
Print Resolution4800 CQ1200 dpi	Specifies the printed output resolutionNote: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness1-5	Lightens or darkens the printed outputNotes:4 is the factory default setting.Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs.If Print Mode is set to Color, then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.
Enhance Fine LinesOffOn	Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow chartsNotes:Off is the factory default setting.You can set this option from the software program. For Windows users, click File > Print > Properties > Preferences > Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop-up menus.To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in a browser window.
Color SaverOffOn	Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used for text is not reduced.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness-6 to 6	Adjusts brightness in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.-6 is the maximum decrease. 6 is the maximum increase.This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
RGB Contrast0-5	Adjusts contrast in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
RGB Saturation0-5	Adjusts saturation in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
Color BalanceCyan-5 to 5Magenta-5 to 5Yellow-5 to 5Black-5 to 5Reset Defaults0	Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each colorNote:0 is the factory default setting.
Color SamplessRGB DisplaysRGB VividDisplay—True BlackVividOff—RGBUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOff—CMYK	Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printerNotes:Selecting any setting prints the sample.Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.
Manual ColorRGB ImageVividsRGB DisplayDisplay True BlacksRGB VividOffRGB TextVividsRGB DisplayDisplay True BlacksRGB VividOffRGB GraphicsVividsRGB DisplayDisplay True BlacksRGB VividOff	Customizes the RGB color conversionsNotes:sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor.sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business graphics and text.Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated colors.Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors.Off turns off color conversion.
Manual ColorCMYK ImageUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOffCMYK TextUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOffCMYK GraphicsUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOff	Customizes the CMYK color conversionsNotes:US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output.Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.Off turns off color conversion.
Spot Color Replacement	Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values
Color Adjust	Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make adjustments for color variations in outputNotes:Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected. Adjusting appears on the display until the process is finished.Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.

Utilities menu

Menu item Description
Remove Held JobsConfidentialHeldNot RestoredAll	Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard diskNotes:Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory.
Format FlashYesNo	Formats the flash memoryWarning—Potential Damage:Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.Notes:Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.No cancels the format request.Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer.A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.The flash memory option card must not be read/write- or write-protected.
Delete Downloads on DiskDelete NowDo Not Delete	Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobsNotes:Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating screen after the deletion process is completed.Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities menu.
Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating the source of a print job problemNotes:When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.
Coverage EstimatorOffOn	Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.Note:Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu

Menu item Description
Scale to FitNoYes	Scales page content to fit the selected paper sizeNote: No is the factory default setting.
AnnotationsDo Not PrintPrint	Prints annotations in a PDFNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu

Menu item Description
Print PS ErrorOffOn	Prints a page containing the PostScript errorNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup ModeOffOn	Enables users to disable the SysStart fileNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Font PriorityResidentFlash/Disk	Establishes the font search orderNotes:•Resident is the factory default setting.•This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write-, write-, or password-protected.•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image SmoothingOffOn	Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low-resolution images and smooths their color transitionsNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.•Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution.

PCL Emul menu

Menu item Description
Font SourceResidentDiskDownloadFlashAll	Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu itemNotes:•Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in RAM.•Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write-, or password-protected.•Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.•All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font NameRO Courier	Identifies a specific font and where it is storedNote:RO Courier is the factory default setting. The RO Courier format shows the font name, font ID, and storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download.
Symbol Set10U PC-812U PC-850	Specifies the symbol set for each font nameNotes:•10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.•A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation SettingsPoint Size1.00–1008.00	Changes the point size for scalable typographic fontsNotes:•12 is the factory default setting.•Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.
PCL Emulation SettingsPitch0.08–100	Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fontsNotes:•10 is the factory default setting.•Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.•For non-scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation SettingsOrientationPortraitLandscape	Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a pageNotes:•Portrait is the factory default setting.•Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation SettingsLines per Page1–255	Specifies the number of lines that print on each pageNotes:•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation SettingsA4 Width198 mm203 mm	Sets the printer to print on A4-size paperNotes:•198 mm is the factory default setting.•The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10-pitch characters.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto CR after LFOffOn	Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control commandNote:Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto LF after CROffOn	Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control commandNote:Off is the factory default setting.
Tray RenumberAssign MP FeederOffNone0-199Assign Tray [x]OffNone0-199Assign Manual PaperOffNone0-199Assign Manual EnvOffNone0-199	Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feedersNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection is displayed only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.•0-199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray RenumberView Factory DefaultsMPF Default = 8T1 Default = 1T2 Default = 4T3 Default = 5T4 Default = 20T5 Default = 21Env Default = 6MPaper Default = 2MEnv Default = 3	Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder
Tray RenumberRestore DefaultsYesNo	Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings

HTML menu

Menu Item Description
Font Name	Joanna MT	Sets the default font for HTML documents
Albertus MT	Letter Gothic	Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font.
Antique Olive	Lubalin Graph
Apple Chancery	Marigold
Arial MT	MonaLisa Recut
Avant Garde	Monaco
Bodoni	New CenturySbk
Bookman	New York
Chicago	Optima
Clarendon	Oxford
Cooper Black	Palatino
Copperplate	StempelGaramond
Coronet	Taffy
Courier	Times
Eurostile	TimesNewRoman
Garamond	Univers
Geneva	Zapf Chancery
Gill Sans	NewSansMTCS
Goudy	NewSansMTCT
Helvetica	New SansMTJA
Hoefler Text	NewSansMTKO
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

Menu item Description
Font Size1–255 pt	Sets the default font size for HTML documentsNotes:•12 pt is the factory default setting.•Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.
Scale1–400%	Scales the default font for HTML documentsNotes:•100% is the factory default setting.•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
OrientationPortraitLandscape	Sets the page orientation for HTML documentsNote: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size8–255 mm	Sets the page margin for HTML documentsNotes:•19 mm is the factory default setting.•Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.
BackgroundsPrintDo Not Print	Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documentsNote: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu

Menu item Description
Auto FitOnOff	Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientationNote: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
InvertOffOn	Inverts bi-tonal monochrome imagesNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
ScalingBest FitAnchor CenterFit Height/WidthFit HeightFit WidthAnchor Top Left	Scales the image to fit the selected paper sizeNotes:Best Fit is the factory default setting.When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
OrientationPortraitLandscapeRev PortraitRev Landscape	Sets the image orientationNote: Portrait is the factory default setting.

XPS menu

Menu item Description
Print Error PagesOffOn	Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errorsNote: Off is the factory default setting.

The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.

English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.

Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings
E-mail Guide	Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory

Statement of Volatility

Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory—along with the types of data stored by each—are described below.

Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.
Non-volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print-related. The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.

There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in your printer. A partial list includes:

•The printer is being decommissioned
•The printer hard drive is being replaced
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location
- The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service

Disposing of a hard drive

Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.

In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises. While most data can be erased electronically, you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing of a printer or hard disk:

Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data
Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits

Note: While most data can be erased electronically, the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored.

Erasing volatile memory

The volatile memory (RAM) installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply power down the device.

Erasing non-volatile memory

There are several methods available for erasing data stored in non-volatile memory, depending on the type of memory device installed, and the type of data stored by that device. For information about how to erase each type of information, see the Embedded Web Server Administrator Guide.

Individual settings—You can erase individual printer settings using the printer control panel, or the printer Embedded Web Server.
Device and network settings—You can erase device and network settings and restore factory defaults by resetting the NVRAM using the printer Config menu.
Security settings—You can restore factory defaults or erase security settings by selecting a behavior for the Security Reset Jumper in the Embedded Web Server, and then moving a hardware jumper located on the motherboard.
Fax data—If your printer does not contain a hard disk, or you have chosen NAND for fax storage, you can erase fax settings and data by resetting the NVRAM using the printer Config menu.
Note: If your printer has a hard disk that has been partitioned for fax storage, you must reformat that partition to erase fax data and settings.
Embedded solutions—You can erase information and settings associated with embedded solutions by uninstalling the solutions, or by restoring factory defaults using the printer Config menu.

Erasing printer hard disk memory

Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.

Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

Using the Embedded Web Server

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Security > Disk Wiping.

Note: Printers without a hard disk will not display Disk Wiping in the Security menu.

2 For Wiping Mode, select one of the following:

Auto—Use this to automatically wipe data following each use (can increase the time between jobs).
Manual—Use this to set up a schedule for disk wiping.

3 Click Submit.

4 From the Security menu, click Disk Wiping.
5 If you have enabled Manual mode and wish to set up a schedule for disk wiping, click Scheduled Disk Wiping.

Notes:

- Scheduled Disk Wiping will not be displayed until after Manual mode has been selected and submitted. - If you do not wish to schedule disk wiping, you can skip steps 5 and 6.

6 Use the Time and Day(s) options to designate when disk wiping should occur, and then click Add. Repeat as needed to schedule additional times for disk wiping. When finished, use the browser Back button to return to the Disk Wiping setup screen.

Note: Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which time the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

7 From the Disk Wiping settings screen, select one of the following for each method of disk wiping (Automatic, Manual, and Scheduled):

Single Pass— This lets you overwrite the printer hard disk in a single pass with a repeating bit pattern.
Multi-pass—This lets you overwrite the printer hard disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22-M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

8 Click Submit.

Using the printer control panel

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down and 6 ^WNO while turning the printer on. It takes approximately a minute to boot into the Configuration menu.

Once the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen should display a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax.

3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears. The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
4 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:

Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22-M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

5 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping. A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

Note: Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

6 Touch Back, and then Exit Config Menu.

The printer will power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Configuring printer hard disk encryption

Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.

Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen.

1 Turn the printer off.

2 Hold down and 6MNO while turning the printer on. It takes approximately a minute to boot into the Configuration menu.

Once the printer is fully on, the touch screen should display a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax.

3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears. The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.

4 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.

Warning: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.

5 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping. A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.

After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.

Warning: Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.

Note: Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.

- Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping and encryption. A status bar will indicate the progress of the encryption task.

6 Touch Back, and then Exit Config Menu.

The printer will power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Maintaining the printer

Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.

Cleaning the exterior of the printer

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the exterior of the printer - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.

4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.

Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.

5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2 Open the scanner cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the scanner glass - 1

text_image

Diagram of a printer with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, 3, and 4 for identification.

1 White underside of the ADF cover

2 White underside of the scanner cover

3 Scanner glass

4 ADF glass

3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.

4 Open the bottom ADF door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the scanner glass - 2

text_image

Diagram of an email client's printer with labeled parts and a magnified view showing the printer's internal structure.

5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
6 Close the bottom ADF door.
7 Close the scanner cover.

Cleaning the ADF parts

Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 280–299 paper jam messages.

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
3 Open the ADF cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the ADF parts - 1

natural_image

Diagram of a device interior showing internal components and a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

Maintaining the printer

4 Remove the pick roller assembly.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the ADF parts - 2

text_image

Diagram of a vehicle engine component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.

5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.

6 Replace the pick roller assembly.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the ADF parts - 3

text_image

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover.

8 Close the ADF cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the ADF parts - 4

natural_image

Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing a green component being inserted, with a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

Cleaning the printhead lenses

Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.

1 Open the front door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the printhead lenses - 1

natural_image

3D rendering of a printer with color-coded internal components and an open door, showing no text or symbols.

2 Remove all print cartridges.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum. Doing so can damage the photoconductor.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the printhead lenses - 2

natural_image

3D diagram of a computer mouse with highlighted internal components and red directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

3 Locate the four printhead lenses.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the printhead lenses - 3

natural_image

Mechanical assembly diagram showing three red arrows pointing to structural components (no text or labels visible)

4 Clean the lenses using compressed air.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses.

5 Reinstall the print cartridges.

Maintaining the printer

6 Close the front door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Cleaning the printhead lenses - 4

natural_image

3D rendering of a printer with internal color-coded components and a red arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Adjusting scanner registration

Scanner Registration lets you align the scan area with the paper location.

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material.

For more information, see "Cleaning the scanner glass" on page 223.

3 Hold down and 6MNO while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.

The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.

5 From the Configuration menu, navigate to:

Scanner Manual Registration > Print Quick Test

6 Align the scanner glass or ADF.

Aligning the scanner glass:

a Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Adjusting scanner registration - 1

text_image

Diagram showing a printer with a person icon and a red dashed line indicating a measurement or annotation path.

b Touch Copy Quick Test.

The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.

c Touch Flatbed.

d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings.

e Touch Submit > Copy Quick Test.

f Compare the new copy to the original.

Repeat the scanner glass alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original.

Aligning the ADF:

a Do one of the following:

To align the ADF front: place the Quick Test page faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
To align the ADF back: place the Quick Test page facedown, short edge first into the ADF.

b Touch Copy Quick Test.

The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.

c Touch ADF Front or ADF Back.
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings.
e Touch Submit > Copy Quick Test.

f Compare the new copy to the original.

Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the original.

7 Touch Back > Exit Configuration.

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust

Checking the status of supplies

A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel

From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of supplies from a network computer

Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Device Status.

The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.

Ordering supplies

To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Notes:

The toner gauge is an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge.
All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.

Ordering a print cartridge

When 88 [color] cartridge low or 88 [color] cartridge nearly low appears, order a new cartridge.

Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard. Extremely low print coverage (less than 1.25%) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.

Recommended print cartridge and part number

Part name	Lexmark Return Program Cartridge	Regular cartridge
Cyan Print Cartridge	C792A1CG	C792A2CG
Cyan Extra High Yield Print Cartridge	X792X1CG	X792X2CG
Magenta Print Cartridge	C792A1MG	C792A2MG
Magenta Extra High Yield Print Cartridge	X792X1MG	X792X2MG
Yellow Print Cartridge	C792A1YG	C792A2YG
Yellow Extra High Yield Print Cartridge	X792X1YG	X792X2YG
Black Print Cartridge	C792A1KG	C792A2KG
Black Extra High Yield Print Cartridge	X792X1KG	X792X2KG

Ordering a fuser or a transfer module

When 80 Fuser Life Warning or 83 Transfer Module Life Warning appears, order a replacement fuser or a transfer module.

When 80 Replace Fuser or 83 Replace Transfer Module appears, install the new fuser or the new transfer module. For installation information, see the documentation that came with the part.

Part name Part number
Fuser 40X7102	40X710040X7101
Transfer Module 40X7103

Ordering a waste toner bottle

When 82 Waste toner bottle nearly full appears, order a replacement waste toner bottle.

When 82 Replace waste toner bottle appears, replace the waste toner bottle.

Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.

Part name Part number
Waste toner bottle C792X77G

Ordering staple cartridges

When Staples Low or Staples Empty appears, order the specified staple cartridge.

For more information, see the illustrations inside the stapler door.

Part name Part number
Staple Cartridges–3 pack(Since a pack contains 5,000 staples, a 3-pack contains 15,000 staples.)	25A0013

Ordering ADF replacement parts

Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the ADF.

Part name Part number
ADF pick assembly 40X4540
Separator roll 40X4605

Ordering a cleaning kit

Use the wet and dry wipes from the cleaning kit to clean the touch screen.

Part name Part number

Cleaning kit (wet and dry wipes) 40X0392

Replacing supplies

Replacing a print cartridge

1 Open the front door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 1

natural_image

3D rendering of a printer with color-coded internal components and an open door, showing no text or symbols.

2 Lift the green handle and pull the print cartridge. Grasp the top handle and lift the cartridge out of the machine.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 2

natural_image

3D diagram of a device interior with colored components and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

3 Place the old cartridge in the replacement cartridge shipping box, and then attach the return label to the box for shipping.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 3

text_image

Diagram illustrating a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly, showing a printer and document.

4 Unpack a new print cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 4

text_image

Diagram illustrating a process of packaging or shipping with labeled steps 1 and 2, showing red arrows indicating movement from a container to a printer.

Maintaining the printer

5 Shake the new cartridge front-to-back and side-to-side to evenly distribute the toner.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 5

natural_image

3D diagram of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating rotational flow, no text or symbols present

6 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 6

natural_image

Two mechanical components with red dashed lines indicating motion or force, one with a yellow base and the other with a black handle (no text or symbols)

7 Insert the new cartridge into the printer, and then push the green handle back in place.

Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 7

natural_image

3D diagram of a computer mouse with internal components and highlighted parts (no text or symbols)

8 Close the front door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing a print cartridge - 8

natural_image

3D illustration of a printer with internal color-coded components and a red arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols present)

Replacing the waste toner bottle

Replace the waste toner bottle when 82.xx Replace waste toner bottle appears. The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner bottle is replaced.

1 Remove the replacement waste toner bottle from its shipping box, and then unpack it.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 1

text_image

Diagram illustrating two steps of printer printing: paper being placed on a box and printer being placed on a bag, with arrows indicating the process.

2 Open the printer front door, and then open tray 1.

3 Pull the green tabs sideways, and then grasp and pull the tabs with both hands to remove the waste toner bottle.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations and red arrows indicating process steps

4 Place the waste toner bottle in the recycling bag.

5 Place the bag into the shipping box you removed the replacement part from.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 3

text_image

Diagram showing two steps of packaging or assembly process: step 1 contains a small electronic component, step 2 shows a blank box with red arrows indicating downward motion.

6 Peel the recycling label off, and place it on the shipping box.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 4

text_image

Diagram showing two steps of document processing: first with a file icon and red arrows indicating action, second with a box containing a photo.

7 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 5

text_image

Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations indicating process steps

8 Close tray 1, and then close the front door.

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Before moving the printer - 1

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Before moving the printer - 2

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
Keep the printer in an upright position.
Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Administrative support

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Using the Embedded Web Server

If the printer is installed on a network, then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:

Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
Checking the status of the printer supplies
Configuring printer settings
Configuring network settings
•Viewing reports

To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Notes:

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly.

2 Press Enter.

Checking the status of the printer

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Device Status.

The device status shows the following:

•Paper tray settings
•Level of toner in the print cartridge
•Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit
•Capacity measurements of certain printer parts

Checking the virtual display

1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.

Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.

The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.

Setting up e-mail alerts

Configure the printer to send you e-mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings.

3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.

4 Select the items for notification, and type the e-mail addresses.

5 Click Submit.

Note: For information on setting up the e-mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports

You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, the network, and supplies.

To view reports from a network printer:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:

2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Restoring factory default settings

If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings.

Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.

From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit

Clearing jams

By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined in this section.

To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue, jam cleared. If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto, then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.

Avoiding jams

Paper tray recommendations

•Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
- Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
- Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.

- Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.

- Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.

- Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.

Paper recommendations

Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
Flex and straighten paper before loading it.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Paper recommendations - 1

natural_image

Two illustrations showing hands holding a curved object with red directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam numbers and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the display. Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Understanding jam numbers and locations - 1

text_image

Technical diagram of a multi-layered printer with numbered parts labeled for identification.

Area Jam numbers What to do
1 200-239		Open side door, and then remove the jammed paper.
2 24x		Open side door of the specified tray, and then remove the jammed paper.
3	250	Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and them remove the jammed paper.
4 280-289		Remove all paper from the ADF, and them remove the jammed paper.
		290-292 Close the ADF cover.
5 400-403460-461		Open the paper transport unit door, and then remove the jammed paper.
6 431-438		Push the button to slide the finisher to the right, open the finisher door, and then remove the jammed paper.
7 455		Open staple door, remove the staple cartridge, and then remove the jammed staple.

200 paper jam

1 Open the side door of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 2

natural_image

Diagram of a computer tower with internal components and a red arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close the side door of the printer.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

201 paper jam

1 Open the side door of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

2 Determine where the jam is located, and then remove it:

a If paper is inside the fuser unit, then open the fuser access door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 2

text_image

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with numbered annotations and a magnified inset highlighting a specific component.

b Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close the side door of the printer.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

202–203 paper jams

If paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 202–203 paper jams - 1

natural_image

Illustration of a printer with a paper feeding into a slot, showing internal structure and a red arrow indicating the paper's direction (no text or symbols present)

Paper jam in the fuser

1 Open the side door of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Paper jam in the fuser - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

2 If paper is visible inside the fuser unit, then open the fuser access door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Paper jam in the fuser - 2

text_image

Technical diagram showing a mechanical assembly with numbered annotations and a magnified inset highlighting a component.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the side door.

Paper jam under the fuser

1 Open the side door of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Paper jam under the fuser - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

2 If paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close the side door of the printer.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

230 paper jam

1 Open the side door of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 2

text_image

Technical diagram of a mechanical device with numbered annotations indicating parts of the component.

3 Grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 3

natural_image

Interior view of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed, paper tray, and printer casing (no text or symbols visible)

4 Close the duplex cover.
5 Close the side door of the printer.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

231–239 paper jams

1 Open the side door of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 231–239 paper jams - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 231–239 paper jams - 2

text_image

Diagram of a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations indicating parts of the printer's internal components.

3 Grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 231–239 paper jams - 3

natural_image

Interior view of a printer's internal structure showing paper feeding into a printer (no text or symbols visible)

4 Close the duplex cover.
5 Close the side door of the printer.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

24x paper jam

Paper jam in Tray 1

1 Open the side door.
2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
3 Close the side door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Paper jam in the optional trays

1 Open the side door of the specified optional tray.
2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Paper jam in the optional trays - 1

natural_image

Illustration of a cabinet interior with an open drawer containing a sheet of paper (no text or symbols visible)

3 Close the side door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

250 paper jam

1 Push the paper pick tab, and then remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 1

text_image

Diagram showing printer operation with labeled steps 1 and 2, highlighting a printer's mechanism.

Warning—Potential Damage: Pulling the paper out, without pushing the paper pick tab first, may cause the paper pick tab to break.

2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - paper jam - 2

text_image

Diagram showing printer printing process with numbered annotations indicating steps 1 and 2

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder, and then adjust the paper guides.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

280–289 paper jams

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 280–289 paper jams - 1

natural_image

Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing a green component being inserted, with no visible text or symbols.

3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the ADF cover.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 280–289 paper jams - 2

natural_image

Diagram of a mechanical device with a red arrow indicating a process or operation, showing internal components without any text or symbols.

5 Reload original documents into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

290–292 paper jams

290 paper jam

Close the ADF cover.

291 paper jam

Close the scanner glass cover.

292 paper jam

Try one of more of the following:

Close the ADF cover.
Close the scanner cover.
Contact your system support system person.

400–403 and 460–461 paper jams

1 Open the paper transport unit door.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 400–403 and 460–461 paper jams - 1

natural_image

Diagram of a printer with a paper feeding into a slot, showing internal structure and a red arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols present)

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the paper transport unit door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

431–438 paper jams

1 Push down the button to slide the output finisher to the right.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 431–438 paper jams - 1

text_image

Diagram showing printer operation with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process flow

2 Open the finisher door, and then removed the jammed paper.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - 431–438 paper jams - 2

natural_image

Diagram of a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close the finisher door.
4 Slide the finisher back until it clicks in place.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

455 staple jam

1 Press the latch to open the stapler door.

Note: The stapler door is located behind the finisher.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - staple jam - 1

natural_image

Diagram of a computer interface showing a device with a green component and a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

2 Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - staple jam - 2

text_image

Diagram showing a device with two labeled parts (① and ②) indicating process steps, highlighting a green component being removed.

3 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - staple jam - 3

natural_image

3D technical illustration of a mechanical housing component with green and red directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

4 Close the staple guard.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - staple jam - 4

natural_image

3D mechanical component diagram showing internal structure with a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

5 Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place.

6 Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - staple jam - 5

natural_image

3D illustration of a computer monitor with an open port and a green arrow pointing to the screen (no text or symbols)

7 Close the stapler door.

8 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Troubleshooting

The indicator light is blinking

The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e-mail. To disable the blinking light, follow these steps:

Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Menus > Settings > General Settings

2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Run initial setup, and then touch Yes > Submit.
3 Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on.
4 From the printer control panel, touch your language.
5 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
6 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch Fax and E-mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.

Note: You can use these same steps to enable fax and e-mail.

Understanding printer messages

Adjusting color

Wait for the process to complete.

An error has occurred with the Flash Drive. Please remove and re-insert the drive.

Try one or more of the following:

Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.

An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.

Try one or more of the following:

Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.

Change [src] to [custom type name]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [custom type name] load [orientation]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [custom string]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [custom string] load [orientation]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [size]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [size] load [orientation]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [size] [type]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [src] to [size] [type] load [orientation]

Incomplete printing of texts and images may be caused by incorrect paper size or type loaded in the paper tray. Try one or more of the following:

Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.
Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
Touch Paper changed, continue to continue printing after the correct paper size and type are loaded in the tray, and are correctly specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.
Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Check [src] orientation or guides

Try one or more of the following:

Move the paper guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct size setting:

—For Windows users, specify the paper size from Print Properties.

—For Macintosh users, specify the paper size from the Page Setup dialog.

Close paper transport cover

Close the paper transport unit cover or door.

Close the left side door of the printer.

Close [tray] door

Close the specified tray door.

Close the side door of the finisher.

Close finisher top cover

Close the top cover of the finisher.

Close front door

Close the front door of the printer.

Close top access cover

Close the specified door or cover.

Disk corrupted

The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard disk must be reformatted.

Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Disk problem

The printer hard disk must be reformatted.

Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.

Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.

Empty the hole punch box

1 Empty the hole punch box.
For instructions on emptying the hole punch box, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.

Error reading USB drive. Remove drive.

An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.

The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.

Some held jobs were not restored

Touch Continue to delete the specified job.

Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.

The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.

Fax Station Name not set up

The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.

Fax Station Number not set up

The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.

Install bin [x]

Try one or more of the following:

• Install the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified bin.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
- Cancel the print job.

Install Tray [x]

Try one or more of the following:

• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
- Cancel the print job.

Insert the hole punch box

Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.

Insert Tray [x]

Insert the specified tray into the printer.

Insert staple cartridge

Try one or more of the following:

Insert a staple cartridge.
Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher.

Load [src] with [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [type] [size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.

- Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.

If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.

If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.

- Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.

- Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [type] [size]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.
Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.

- Cancel the print job.

Load staples

Try one or more of the following:

-Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Memory full, cannot print faxes

There is not enough memory to print the fax job.

Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted.

Reattach bin [x]

Try one or more of the following:

Turn the printer off and then back on.
•Reattach the specified bin:

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Reattach the bin.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.

- Remove the specified bin:

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Contact Customer Support.

- Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.

Reattach bin [x] - [y]

Try one or more of the following:

Turn the printer off and then back on.
•Reattach the specified bins:

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Reattach the bins.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.

- Remove the specified bins:

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Contact Customer Support.

- Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins.

Remove packaging material, [area name]

Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.

Remove paper from bin [x]

Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.

If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.

Remove paper from all bins

Output bins have reached their capacity. Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue printing.

Remove paper from [linked bin set name]

Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.

If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.

Restore Held Jobs?

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open

Close the ADF cover.

Slide finisher to the left

Slide the mailbox or finisher to the left until it clicks into place.

Supply needed to complete job

A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Touch Cancel to clear the message.

Unsupported disk

An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.

Tray [x] paper size unsupported

The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.

31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge

Try one or more of the following:

1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge.
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.

2 Touch Continue to clear the message.

Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective print cartridge.

32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device

1 Remove the unsupported print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.

2 Touch Continue to clear the message.

34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]

Try one or more of the following:

Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are trying to print.
Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.
Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
Cancel the print job.

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
•Install additional memory.

37 Insufficient memory to collate job

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
Cancel the current print job.

37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.

37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted

The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.

Touch Continue to clear the message.

38 Memory full

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
Cancel the current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Cancel the current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.

40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge

Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing.

51 Defective flash detected

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Cancel the current print job.

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.

54 Network [x] software error

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to continue printing.
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.

54 Serial option [x] error

Try one or more of the following:

Check that the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port.
Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and on the host computer.
Touch Continue to continue printing.
Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.

54 Standard network software error

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to continue printing.
Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.

55 Unsupported option in slot [x]

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

56 Parallel port [x] disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

56 Serial port [x] disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

56 Standard USB port disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

56 Standard parallel port disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

56 USB port [x] disabled

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored

Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:

•The printer firmware has been updated.
- Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
- The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
- The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.

Touch Continue to clear the message.

58 Too many bins attached

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional bins.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many disks installed

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many flash options installed

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many trays attached

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Input config error

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.

4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

59 Incompatible output bin [x]

Try one or more of the following:

Remove the specified output bin.
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin.

61 Remove defective disk

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.

62 Disk full

Try one or more of the following:

Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.

80.xx Fuser near life warning

1 Order a replacement fuser immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

80.xx Fuser life warning

Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

80.xx Replace fuser

Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

80.xx Fuser missing

1 Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

82.xx Replace waste toner bottle

1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

82.xx Waste toner bottle missing

Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full

Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.

1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

83.xx Replace transfer module

Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

83.xx Transfer module life warning

1 Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

83.xx Transfer module missing

Insert the transfer module into the printer.

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low

Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge.

88.xx [color] cartridge low

1 Remove the specified cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Notes:

Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the cartridge.
Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.

88.xx [Color] cartridge very low

The specified print cartridge is very low.

1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low

The specified print cartridge is critically low.

1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

840.01 Scanner disabled by admin

Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.

840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.

The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it. Try one or more of the following:

1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Wait for 15 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, then touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.

4 Place the document in the ADF, and then adjust the paper guides.
5 From the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
6 Change the copy settings as needed.
7 Touch Copy It.

1565 Emulation error, load emulation option

The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card.

To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Solving basic printer problems

If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:

The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
All options are properly installed.
•The printer driver settings are correct.

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. This often fixes the problem.

Solving printing problems

Multiple-language PDF files do not print

The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.

1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.

Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds

The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.

Error message about reading USB drive appears

Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices, see "Printing from a flash drive" on page 84.

Print jobs do not print

Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT

Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.

CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL

Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.

CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY

Load paper in the tray.

MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED

Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software.

MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY

Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.

The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE

For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED

Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

Confidential and other held jobs do not print

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS

The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

Delete the print job, and then print it again.
For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.

If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.

For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents" check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY

Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.

Print job takes longer than expected

Try one or more of the following:

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB

Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job.

TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING

From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off > √

CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS

When using Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:

For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

Incorrect characters print

Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.

Tray linking does not work

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER

Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.

USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS

Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Large jobs do not collate

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON

From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.

Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB

Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY

Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.

Unexpected page breaks

INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout
2 Increase the Print Timeout value, and then touch.

Solving copy problems

Copier does not respond

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER

Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

Scanner unit does not close

Make sure there are no obstructions:

1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.

Poor copy quality

These are some examples of poor copy quality:

Blank pages
Checkerboard pattern
•Distorted graphics or pictures
Missing characters
Faded print
Dark print
Skewed lines
•Smudges
•Streaks
•Unexpected characters
White lines in print

Try one or more of the following:

CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES

Check the display and clear any error messages.

REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE

When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.

CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS

The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.

For more information, see "Cleaning the scanner glass" on page 223.

ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY

Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.

Check the quality of the original document.

PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS

When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:

On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting

- On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.

When the text is light or disappearing:

•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Content > Text > √ > select the appropriate source for the original document being copied > √

•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting

•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting

•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting

•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting

When the output appears washed out or overexposed:

On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned.
From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting

•From the Copy screen, navigate to:

Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting

Partial document or photo copies

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Solving scanner problems

Checking an unresponsive scanner

If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:

•The printer is turned on.
- The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
- The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
- The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
- The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
- Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem with the scanner.

Scan was not successful

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS

Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM

Turn off and then restart the computer.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING

Close all programs not being used.

THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH

Select a lower scan resolution.

Poor scanned image quality

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY

Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see "Cleaning the scanner glass" on page 223.

ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION

Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.

CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT

Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Partial document or photo scans

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:

- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.

- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Cannot scan from a computer

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER

Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS

Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Solving fax problems

Caller ID is not shown

Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.

If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.

Cannot send or receive a fax

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER

Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS

Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:

•Telephone
-Handset
- Answering machine

CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK

1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST

The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.

If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.
If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE

Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.
If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.

TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT

To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.

CHECK FOR JAMS

Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.

TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING

Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.

VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION

Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.

THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL

1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.

Can send but not receive faxes

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER

If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.

CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS

The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
4 Click Submit.

REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the toner or print cartridge.

Can receive but not send faxes

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE

On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.

THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY

Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY

Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.

Received fax has poor print quality

Try one or more of the following:

RESEND THE DOCUMENT

Ask the person who sent you the fax to:

Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.

REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE

When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:

1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.

3 In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600

4 Click Submit.

Solving home screen applications problems

Forms are not available or are not working

MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK POINTING TO THE FORM IS IN THE BOOKMARKS ROOT FOLDER

If the bookmark pointing to the form was created in a subfolder of the Bookmarks folder, then it will not be available under the Forms solution. Delete the bookmark, and recreate it under the Bookmarks root folder.

MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS POINTING TO THE CORRECT LOCATION

The printer does not validate bookmarks. If the URL or network location that was specified when the bookmark was created is incorrect, then the printer will not be able to access the document.

The application icon is missing from the home screen

For the application to work, at least one valid destination must be enabled. If no valid destinations are available, then the application icon will disappear from the home screen.

To display the application icon when no destinations are available:

1 From the application configuration settings, under Home Screen Button, select Always show button under Display Option.
2 Click Apply.

An application error has occurred

CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS

1 Type the printer IP address or hostname in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions > System tab > Log.

MAKE SURE THE FILENAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE

Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.

To help prevent errors, make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination configuration settings.

ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS

In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable Color, or change the Content type to Text.

CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT

If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support for additional help.

A network destination stopped working or is invalid

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER AUTHENTICATION IS CONFIGURED

If the application is configured to use MFP authentication credentials, then the printer authentication settings must be configured from the Embedded Web Server. For more information on configuring the printer authentication settings, see the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide available on www.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE DESTINATION HAS A VALID NETWORK ADDRESS

If the destination has been moved, then the network address may have changed. The destination network address can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server. For information on accessing or editing a destination, see Editing a destination.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK

Make sure that all appropriate network cables are securely connected and that the network settings of the printer are correctly configured. For information on networking the printer, see the printer User's Guide or the Software and Documentation CD that came with the printer.

CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS

1 Type the printer IP address or hostname in the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

2 Click Settings > Solutions > Embedded Solutions > System tab > Log.

Printer cannot scan to the selected destination

MAKE SURE THE DESTINATION IS VALID

Verify that the destination is valid in the application configuration settings.

If the destination has been moved, the network address may have changed. The destination network address can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server. For information on accessing or editing a destination, see Editing a destination.

IF THE PRINTER AND DESTINATION RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS, THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED

If the destination exists within a different Windows domain than the printer, you can edit the destination from the application's configuration page and enter the appropriate Windows domain information in the domain field as part of the Network Folder Address.

Add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the printer network setup. For information on adding or editing domain names, see Specifying the Domain Search Order.

MAKE SURE THE FIREWALL SOFTWARE IS ALLOWING COMMUNICATION

If the destination resides on a computer that uses a newer version of the Windows operating system (Windows XP or later), and the Windows Firewall is enabled, the printer may have difficulty sending information to the destination if the destination and the printer reside on different subnets. The Windows Firewall must either be configured to allow communication with the subnet the printer resides on, or the destination should be set up on the same subnet as the printer.

MAKE SURE A FILE WITH THE DEFAULT FILE NAME DOES NOT ALREADY EXIST IN THE DESTINATION

If the three configuration settings for the File Name section of the solution's configuration page are not selected (allow user to enter file name; append time stamp; overwrite existing file), and a file using the default file name already exists within the destination, there will be no method in place to distinguish the newly scanned file from the file present in the destination. The printer will not be able to overwrite the old file, the new file will not receive a time stamp to differentiate it from the old file, and the user will not be able to give the new file a different name. In this case, the old file must either be removed from the destination, or one of the previously mentioned settings must be turned on.

MAKE SURE THE NETWORK IS FUNCTIONING AND THE PRINTER CAN COMMUNICATE

Verify all network connections and that the network settings of the printer are configured appropriately. For information on networking the printer, see the User's Guide and additional documentation on the Software and Documentation CD that shipped with the printer.

FOR NETWORKS USING LDAP AUTHENTICATION, MAKE SURE LDAP SETTINGS HAVE BEEN CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

Verify that LDAP settings are configured appropriately in your printer setup, and in the setup dialog. For more information on LDAP settings, see Adding a destination, and Configuring LDAP.

MAKE SURE YOU HAVE PERMISSION TO SAVE SCANS TO THIS DESTINATION

On the application Edit Destination screen, clear the contents of the Path Suffix field; or on the destination server, change the user's home folder to match the contents of the Path Suffix field.

Solving option problems

Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

RESET THE PRINTER

Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the printer from the wall outlet.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED

Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed, then reinstall it.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS AVAILABLE IN THE PRINTER DRIVER

It may be necessary to manually add the option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 41.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED

From the program you are using, select the option. Mac OS 9 users should make sure the printer is set up in the Chooser.

Paper tray problems

Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY

1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.

RESET THE PRINTER

Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY

If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.

2,000-sheet drawer problems

CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION

Make sure the 2,000-sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.

LOAD PAPER

If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder

CLEAR ANY JAMS

Open the side door of the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.

AVOID PAPER JAMS

Flex the paper.
Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
•Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray.
Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.

Cannot detect flash memory card

Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.

Cannot detect printer hard disk

Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS

Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.

CHECK THE CABLE

Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.

MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.

Internal print server does not operate correctly

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS

Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.

MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY

For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:

1 Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2 Click Additional.
3 Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.

Memory card

Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly

CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION

Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.

CHECK THE CABLE

Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.

Solving paper feed problems

Paper frequently jams

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER

Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY

Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder.

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY

Load paper from a fresh package.
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

CHECK THE PAPER PATH

The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.

Jammed pages are not reprinted

TURN ON JAM RECOVERY

1 From the home screen, navigate to:

Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3 Touch Submit.

Solving print quality problems

The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions do not correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.

Isolating print quality problems

Print the print quality test pages to help isolate print quality problems.

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Load letter- or A4-size paper in the tray or feeder.
3 Hold down and 6MNO while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch Print Quality Pages > Print Quality Pages.
The print quality test pages print.
6 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

Printer is printing blank pages

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Printer is printing blank pages - 1

natural_image

Blank white document page with a corner bookmark (no text or symbols)

Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE

Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four cartridges:

1 Remove the cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.

Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Characters have jagged or uneven edges - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.

Colors are not aligned properly

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Colors are not aligned properly - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Color has shifted outside of the appropriate area or has been superimposed over another color area. Try one or more of the following:

PERFORM COLOR ADJUST

From the printer control panel Quality menu, perform Color Adjust.

REINSTALL THE PRINT CARTRIDGES

Remove and reinstall all four print cartridges.

ADJUST THE COLOR ALIGNMENT

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Load letter- or A4-size paper in the tray.
3 Hold down and 6MNO while turning the printer on.
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.
5 Touch Color Alignment > Print Alignment Page.
The color alignment pages print.
6 Touch Color Alignment.
7 On the printed alignment pages, find the straightest of the 20 lines beside the letter A.
8 From the printer control panel, touch the arrows to select that number.
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to align sets B through L.
10 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.

Note: If necessary, adjust the color alignment again.

Clipped images

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE GUIDES

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages

You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).

Shadow images appear on prints

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Shadow images appear on prints - 1

natural_image

Generic document icon with a black rectangle and gray rectangle, no text or symbols present.

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images.

1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.

Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow.

If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Gray background on prints

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Gray background on prints - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

CHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING

Try one or more of the following:

Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
Increase the background removal setting.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.

Incorrect margins

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Incorrect margins - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints - 2

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the defective print cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Paper curl

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Print irregularities

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Print irregularities - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Print irregularities - 2

natural_image

Generic document icon with geometric shapes (triangle, square, semicircle) and a document symbol on the left page (no text or labels)

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS

Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Print is too dark

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Print is too dark - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the defective print cartridge.

Print is too light

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Print is too light - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE

The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge.

3 Reinsert the print cartridge.

Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the print cartridge.

If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the defective print cartridge.

Repeating defects appear on prints

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Repeating defects appear on prints - 1

Try one or more of the following:

REPLACE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the print cartridge of the color with the repeating defect, if the print defects occur in the following instances:

•in every 37.7 mm (1.48 in.) of the page
•in every 41.6 mm (1.64 in.) of the page
•in every 42.7 mm (1.68 in.) of the page
•in every 94.3 mm (3.71 in.) of the page

REPLACE THE FUSER

Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances:

•in every 95.0 mm (3.74 in.) of the page
•in every 146.7 mm (5.78 in.) of the page

Skewed print

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.

CHECK THE PAPER

Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.

Solid color or black pages appear on prints

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Solid color or black pages appear on prints - 1

natural_image

Simple graphic of a document with a white top and black bottom, no text or symbols present.

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON TONER

- Remove the print cartridges.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
•Reinsert the print cartridges.

Note: If the quality does not improve, replace the print cartridges.

- If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper - 2

text_image

A.B.C D.E.F

Try one or more of the following:

ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT

If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE

Use only the recommended transparencies.
Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder.

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER

When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge:

1 Remove the print cartridge.

Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.

3 Reinsert the print cartridge.

If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Try one or more of the following:

SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER

From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn, defective, or empty print cartridge.

Streaked vertical lines

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Streaked vertical lines - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE TONER IS SMEARED

Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:

From the printer control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper Menu.
For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.

A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective toner cartridge.

THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the transfer module.

Toner fog or background shading appears on a page

Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND ARE NOT DEFECTIVE

Reinstall or replace the print cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH

Clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

RECALIBRATE THE PRINTER

Perform color adjust from the printer control panel Quality menu.

CHECK THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR APPLICATION

The software program or application may have specified an off-white background.

Toner rubs off

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Toner rubs off - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

CHECK THE PAPER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS

Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy. If necessary, change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough in the printer control panel Paper menu.

THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the fuser.

Toner specks

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Toner specks - 1

text_image

ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective or worn cartridges.

THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH

Contact Customer Support.

Transparency print quality is poor

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES

Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:

1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

Uneven print density

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Uneven print density - 1

text_image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT CARTRIDGE

Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.

Solving color quality problems

This section helps answer some basic color-related questions and describes how some of the features provided in the Quality Menu can be used to solve typical color problems.

FAQ about color printing

What is RGB color?

Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.

What is CMYK color?

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.

Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software? What settings should I use for the best color?

The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.

Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?

The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color-matching problems, see the question, "How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?"

The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?

Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance.

My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?

This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies.

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user-selected color conversion tables to process objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion will be implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).

Notes:

Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred colors for the majority of documents.

To manually apply a different color conversion table:

1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.

Manual Color menu

Object type Color conversion tables
RGB ImageRGB TextRGB Graphics	Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all incoming color formats.sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics.Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK ImageCMYK TextCMYK Graphics	US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output.Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting.Off—No color correction is implemented.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.

By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object.

Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.

Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?

Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user-defined RGB or CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box.

To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:

1 Open a Web browser.
2 In the address bar, type the network printer IP address.
3 Click Configuration.
4 Click Color Samples.
5 Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range.
6 When the Detailed Options page appears, select a color conversion table.
7 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
8 Enter an Increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
9 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set.

Embedded Web Server does not open

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION

Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.

CHECK ADDRESS ENTERED INTO THE WEB BROWSER

Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https://instead of http:// before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
Make sure you have the correct printer IP address.

TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS

Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.

Contacting customer support

When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark X792de, X792dte, X792dtfe, X792dtpe, X792dtme, X792dtse

Machine type:

7562,4917

Model(s):

432, 436, dn1, dn2, gd1, gd2, dt1, dt2, gt1, gt2, df1, df2, gf1, gf2, d01, d02, g01, g02, t01, t02, g91, g92, f01, f02, g81, g82

Edition notice

August 2010

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user's responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.

If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:

Lexmark International, Inc.

Bldg 004-2/CSC

740 New Circle Road NW

Lexington, KY 40550

USA

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

PrintCryption and ScanBack are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.

Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

PCL ^® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company's designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:

Albertus The Monotype	Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur	Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times	Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa	International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery	International Typeface Corporation
Joanna	The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold	Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York	Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford	Arthur Baker

Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Taffy Agfa Corporation

Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc

Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Modular component notice

This product contains the following modular component(s):

Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A-M01003

Licensing notices

The following documents can be viewed from the installation software CD.

Directory File
CD:\LEGAL FW_License.pdf	mDNS.tar.gzExpat.txtInst_lib.txtInstgui.txtInstgui.zip

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 53 dBA
Ready 35 dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive - 1

text_image

Prohibition sign for a trash bin with red X marks and a black base, indicating no waste or plastic discharge.

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.

Static sensitivity notice

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Static sensitivity notice - 1

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - ENERGY STAR - 1

Notices

Temperature information

Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature -40° to 40°C (104°F)

Laser notice

This product contains a Class I (1) laser producing invisible laser radiation. The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) AlGaAs dual beam laser enclosed in a non-serviceable printhead assembly operating in the wavelength of 775-800 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation exceeding Class I levels during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Laser advisory label - 1

text_image

DANGER - Invisible laser radiation which are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam. Perigo - Emissão invisível de laser quando os cartuchos são removidos e a trava aberta. Evite exposição ao feixe. Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kaselo uklonjene i ponilitena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati idaganje zracima. Pozor - Nebezpeči výskytu neviditelného laserového zárení pri odstranění kazel a odblokovaní pojistky. Nevystavulje se paprskům Fare - Usynlig laserstráling, når tonerkassetterne fjernes og aflásning ophaeves. Undgá at komme i kontakt med strålen. Pas opl - Onzichtbare laserstraling als cartridges worden verwijderd en vergrendeling open is. Voorkom blootsitelling aan de stralen. Danger - Radiations invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser. Vaara - Nákymiktäntä lasersäteilyő na varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä säteelle altüstumista. Gefahr - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden! Klúšuvos - Ásponti akvisejólales kárčka čísov aporóvnára na kaatesz kain efektristetvetná v návoprátkus. Atropýctet ny těkton om běžun nuv aktivnu. Figyelemí A kazetták kivételekor áthatatlan lézersugárzás léphet fel, ha a biztonsági kapcsoló nem můködik. Kerúljük el a lézersugarat. Pericolo - Emissione di radiazioni laser durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l'esposizione ai raggi Fare - Usynlig laserstráling når kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngá eksponering. Niebezpieczeństwo - niewildoczne promieniowanie laserowe po wyjęcji kasety i wyłączeniu blokady. Unikać ekspozycjci na wiązkę. Onaço! Prio cnytań kartridrkąs and naruhynienia φίκαιτηνεννικόνον πλαρούπονος πλαρούπονος ηματωνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνηνην Varning - Osynlig laserstrálning når kassetterna är borttagna och spärren avaktiverad. Undvik att utsätta dig för strålen. 危険 - 当鼓粉盒被取出并且互頓失去作用时有着不見的激光辐射。请避免暴露在激光光束下。危険 - 移除碳粉煤與安全連鎖開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射軸射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。危険:カートリッジが取外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光を放射します。光線に当らないようにして下さい。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing	The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs.	1000 W
Copy The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents.		1050 W
Scan The product is scanning hard-copy documents. 115 W
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 70 W
Sleep Mode	The product is in a high-level energy-saving mode.	17 W
Hibernate	The product is in a low-level energy-saving mode.	0.75 W
Off	The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.	0 W

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 30

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.

European Community (EC) directives conformity

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic

compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.

This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Radio interference notice

Warning

This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises' wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

South Africa telecommunications notice

This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

LEXMARK X792dtpe - Notice to Users in the European Union - 1

Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Notice to users in the European Union

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and 2005/32/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-using products.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE

This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

CE!

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.

This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.

AT	BE	BG	CH	CY	CZ	DE	DK	EE
EL	ES	FI	FR	HR	HU	IE	IS	IT
LI	LT	LU	LV	MT	NL	NO	PL	PT
RO	SE	SI	SK	TR	UK

Česky	Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk	Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch	Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Ελληνική	ME THN ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English	Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español	Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti	Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi	Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français	Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar	Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírásainak.
Íslenska	Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano	Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski	Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių	Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti	Bil-preženti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands	Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk	Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski	Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português	A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky	Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko	Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska	Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Statement of Limited Warranty

Lexmark X792de, X792dte, X792dtfe, X792dtpe, X792dtme, X792dtse

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as "Remarketer."

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user's guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.

LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

This License Agreement ("Software License Agreement") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. ("Lexmark") that, to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product. The term "Software Program" includes machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and recordings), and associated media, printed materials and electronic documentation, whether incorporated into, distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.

1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact disk) on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.

2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM. TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.

This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time to time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified. If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program.

The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software applications and/or internet web pages.

3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.

IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM, OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT), REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS, AFFILIATES, OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD-PARTY CLAIM, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.

5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this License Agreement:

a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term "Use" means storing, loading, installing, executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer. You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has the effect of overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark, trade name, trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program's proprietary notices. You may not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.
c Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License Agreement.
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties ("Freeware") is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the time of download. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such license.

6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software components, media, printed materials, and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software Program or components thereof. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms. Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You may not rent, sublicense, or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement, and any attempt to do so shall be void.

7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.

8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program, except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability, error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse compilation. You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program.

9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement.

10 TERM. This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree

to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any form.

11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program.

12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under applicable law.

13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky, United States of America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.

14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause).

15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you. Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services.

16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.

17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement electronically. This means that when you click the "Agree" or "Yes" button on this page or use this product, you acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to "sign" a contract with Lexmark.

18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this License Agreement and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract.

19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, the terms of this License Agreement shall control.

MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES

1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.

2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.

ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE

Contains Flash ^® , Flash ^® Lite ^™ and/or Reader ^® technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated

Notices

This Product contains Adobe® Flash® player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Index

Numerics

1565 Emulation error, load emulation option 269

2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder installing 37

200 paper jam 242

2000-sheet high-capacity feeder loading 66

201 paper jam 242

202–203 paper jams 243

230 paper jam 244

231–239 paper jams 245

24x paper jam 245

250 paper jam 246

280–289 paper jam 247

290–292 paper jams 248

31.xx Missing or Defective [color] cartridge 262

32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device 262

34 Incorrect paper size, open [src] 262

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 262

37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 263

37 Insufficient memory to collate job 263

37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted 263

38 Memory full 263

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 263

40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge 263

400–403 paper jams 248

431–438 paper jams 249

455 staple jam 249

460–461 paper jams 248

51 Defective flash detected 263

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 264

54 Network [x] software error 264

54 Serial option [x] error 264

54 Standard network software error 264

55 Unsupported option in slot [x] 264

550-sheet tray installing 37

550-sheet tray (standard or optional) loading 63

56 Parallel port [x] disabled 265

56 Serial port [x] disabled 265

56 Standard parallel port disabled 265

56 Standard USB port disabled 265

56 USB port [x] disabled 265

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored 265

58 Input config error 266

58 Too many bins attached 266

58 Too many disks installed 266

58 Too many flash options installed 266

58 Too many trays attached 266

59 Incompatible output bin [x] 267

61 Remove defective disk 267

62 Disk full 267

80.xx Fuser life warning 267

80.xx Fuser missing 267

80.xx Fuser near life warning 267

80.xx Replace fuser 267

82.xx Replace waste toner bottle 268

82.xx Waste toner bottle missing 268

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 268

83.xx Replace transfer module 268

83.xx Transfer module life warning 268

83.xx Transfer module missing 268

840.01 Scanner disabled by admin 269

840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. 269

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low 269

88.xx [color] cartridge low 268, 269

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low 268

A

accessing the system board 20

Active NIC menu 147

adding a date and time stamp 97

adding bookmarks

using the Embedded Web Server 53

using the printer control panel 53

adding bookmarks from the printer control panel 53

adding bookmarks using the

Embedded Web Server 53

address book, fax using 116

ADF

copying using 90

ADF parts

cleaning 224

ADF pick assembly ordering 230

Adjusting color 252

adjusting copy quality 94

adjusting Sleep Mode 58

adjusting toner darkness 86

advanced options, touch-screen copy 100

An error has occurred with the flash drive 252

AppleTalk menu 152

applications list home screen 52

assigning a custom paper type name 72

attaching cables 38

attaching the system board cover 20

available internal options 19

avoiding paper jams 240

B

Bin Setup menu 145

black-and-white copying 92

black-and-white printing 86

blank pages 289

blocking junk faxes 118

buttons, printer control panel 14

buttons, touch screen 16

C

cables

Ethernet 38

USB 38

calling customer support 305

canceling

print job, from computer 88

canceling a print job

from a computer 88

from the printer control panel 88

cannot open Embedded Web

Server 304

card stock

loading in multipurpose

feeder 68

tips 81

Change [input src] to [custom type

name] load [orientation] 253

Change [src] to [custom

string] 253

Change [src] to [custom string] load

[orientation] 253

Change [src] to [custom type

name] 253

Change [src] to [size] 254

Change [src] to [size] [type] 254

Change [src] to [size] [type] load

[orientation] 254

Change [src] to [size] load

[orientation] 254

Check [src] orientation or

guides 255

checking an unresponsive

printer 270

checking an unresponsive

scanner 276

checking printer status

on Embedded Web Server 237

checking printer status using the

Embedded Web Server 237

checking status of supplies 228

checking the status of

supplies 228

checking the virtual display

using the Embedded Web

Server 238

checking virtual display

using the Embedded Web

Server 238

choosing a fax connection 109

cleaning

ADF parts 224

exterior of the printer 222

scanner glass 223

cleaning kit

ordering 231

cleaning the printhead lenses 226

Close [tray] door 255

Close finisher top cover 255

Close paper transport cover 255

Close top access cover 255

collating copies 95

confidential print jobs 82

printing from a Macintosh

computer 82

printing from Windows 82

Confidential Print menu 162

configuration information

wireless network 41

configurations

printer 10

Configure MP menu 137

configuring e-mail settings 101

configuring port settings 49

connecting printer to distinctive

ring service 112

connecting the printer to

regional adapters 112

conservation settings

brightness, adjusting 59

Quiet Mode 57

Sleep Mode 58, 59

standard exit bin lighting 60

conserving supplies 56

contacting customer support 305

control panel, printer 14

copy quality

adjusting 94

copy screen

advanced options 100

options 98, 99, 100, 125

Copy Settings menu 172

copy troubleshooting

copier does not respond 273

partial document or photo

copies 275

poor copy quality 274

poor scanned image quality 277

scanner unit does not close 274

copying

adding a date and time stamp 97

adding an overlay message 97

adjusting quality 94

canceling a copy job 97, 98

collating copies 95

custom job (job build) 96

different paper sizes 93

enlarging 94

in black-and-white 92

multiple pages on one sheet 96

on both sides of the paper

(duplexing) 93

on letterhead 91

on transparencies 91

photos 91

placing separator sheets between

copies 95

quick copy 90

reducing 94

selecting a tray 92

to a different size 92

using the ADF 90

using the scanner glass

(flatbed) 91

copying different paper sizes 93

copying multiple pages on one

sheet 96

copying on both sides of the paper

(duplexing) 93

copying on letterhead 91

copying on transparencies 91

copying photos 91

corrupted printer hard disk 255

creating a fax destination shortcut

using the Embedded Web

Server 115

creating an FTP shortcut

using the Embedded Web

Server 123

creating profiles

using the ScanBack Utility 128

Custom Bin Names menu 144

custom name

configuring 72

Custom Names menu 143

custom paper type name

creating 72

Custom Scan Sizes menu 144

Custom Type [x]

changing name 72

changing paper type 72

Custom Types menu 143

D

date and time, fax setting 113

daylight savings time, faxing 114

Default Source menu 134

destination

adding 54

deleting 54

editing 54

different paper sizes, copying 93

directory list printing 85

disk wiping 219

Disk Wiping menu 162

display troubleshooting display is blank 270

display shows only diamonds 270

display, printer control panel 14 adjusting brightness 59

disposing of printer hard disk 218

distinctive ring service, fax connecting to 112

documents, printing from Macintosh 79

from Windows 79

duplexing 93

E

Eco-Mode setting 57

Edit Security Setups menu 160

email, sending

using the touch screen 103

Embedded Web Server accessing 237

administrator settings 237

checking printer status 237

checking supplies 228

creating a fax destination shortcut 115

creating an FTP shortcut 123

creating e-mail shortcuts 102

functions 237

initial fax setup 109

networking settings 237

problem accessing 304

setting up e-mail alerts 238

using 237

Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide where to find 237

emission

notices 308, 309, 311, 312, 315, 316

Empty the hole punch box 256

encrypting the printer hard disk 221

enlarging a copy 94

envelopes

loading in multipurpose feeder 68

tips on using 80

environmental settings

brightness, adjusting 59

conserving supplies 56

Hibernate Mode 59

Quiet Mode 57

Sleep Mode 58

standard exit bin lighting 60

erasing hard disk memory 219

erasing non-volatile memory 219

erasing volatile memory 219

Ethernet networking

Macintosh 47

Windows 47

Ethernet port 38

exit bins

linking 72

exporting a configuration

using the Embedded Web Server 55

exporting a configuration using the

Embedded Web Server 55

exterior of the printer cleaning 222

e-mail

canceling 105

disabling 252

enabling 252

e-mail alerts

low supply levels 238

paper jam 238

setting up 238

e-mail function

setting up 101

e-mail screen

advanced options 106, 107

options 105, 106, 107

E-mail Settings menu 189

e-mail shortcuts, creating

using the Embedded Web Server 102

e-mail, sending

using a shortcut number 103

e-mailing

adding message line 104

adding subject line 104

changing output file type 104

configuring e-mail settings 101

creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 102

creating shortcuts using the touch screen 102

setting up e-mail function 101

using a shortcut number 103

using the address book 103

using the touch screen 103

F

factory defaults

restoring 239

FAQ about color printing 301

fax

disabling 252

document type, settings 118

enabling 252

fax connection

connecting the printer to the wall jack 110

connecting to a DSL line 110

connecting to a PBX or ISDN 111

fax connections

regional adapters 112

fax log

viewing 117

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)

menu 179

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)

menu 187

Fax partition inoperative. Contact

system administrator. 256

fax screen

advanced options 119, 120 options 119

Fax server 'To Format' not set up.

Contact system administrator. 256

Fax Station Name not set up 257

Fax Station Number not set up 257

fax troubleshooting

caller ID is not shown 278

can receive but not send faxes 280
can send but not receive faxes 280
cannot send or receive a fax 278
received fax has poor print quality 281
faxing
blocking junk faxes 118
canceling a fax job 118
changing resolution 116
choosing a fax connection 109
configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 114
creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 115
creating shortcuts using the touch screen 115
distinctive ring service 112
fax setup 109
forwarding faxes 121
holding faxes 120
making a fax lighter or darker 117
sending a fax at a scheduled time 117
sending using the computer 114
sending using the touch screen 114
setting the date and time 113
setting the fax number or station number 113
setting the outgoing fax name or station name 113
using shortcuts 116
using the address book 116
viewing a fax log 117
FCC notices 308, 312, 315
features
Scan Center 128
fiber optic
network setup 47
finding more information about the printer 9
finisher
finishing features 86
supported paper sizes 86
finisher features 86
Finishing menu 206
firmware card
installing 25

flash drive printing from 84

Flash Drive menu 199

flash drives

supported file types 83

flash memory card installing 25

troubleshooting 286

font sample list printing 85

forwarding faxes 121

FTP

scanning using address book 123

FTP address

creating shortcuts using the touch screen 124

FTP screen

advanced options 126

options 124, 125

FTP Settings menu 194

fuser or transfer module ordering 230

G

General Settings menu 165

Green settings

Eco-Mode 57

Quiet Mode 57

green settings

Hibernate Mode 59

H

hard disk

wiping 219

hard disk memory erasing 219

held jobs 82

printing from a Macintosh computer 82

printing from Windows 82

Help menu 217

Hibernate Mode using 59

holding faxes 120

home screen

applications 52

customizing 52

home screen applications using 52

home screen buttons description 15

HTML menu 215

|

Image menu 216

importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 55

importing a configuration using the

Embedded Web Server 55

indicator light is blinking troubleshooting 252

initial fax setup 109 using the Embedded Web Server 109

Insert hole punch box 257

Insert staple cartridge 258

Install bin [x] 257

Install Tray [x] 257

installing a memory card 23

installing an Internal Solutions Port 27

installing on a wireless network using Windows 42

installing options order of installation 37

installing printer on wireless network 42

installing printer hard disk 31

installing printer on a network wired networking 47

installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 44

installing printer software adding options 41

installing the 2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder 37

installing the 550-sheet tray 37

installing the printer software 40 internal print server troubleshooting 287

Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 49 installing 27 troubleshooting 286

IPv6 menu 151

isolating print quality problems 86, 288

J

jams

avoiding 240

locating jam areas 240

locations 240

numbers 240

jams, clearing

200 paper jam 242

201 paper jam 242

202–203 paper jams 243

230 paper jam 244

231–239 paper jams 245

24x paper jam 245

250 paper jam 246

280–289 paper jam 247

280-299 224

290–292 paper jams 248

400–403 paper jams 248

431–438 paper jams 249

455 staple jam 249

460–461 paper jams 248

L

labels, paper

tips 81

letterhead

copying on 91

loading, 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder 66

loading, multipurpose feeder 79

loading, trays 79

letterhead printing 79

light colored line, white line, or

incorrectly colored line appears on

prints 293

light, indicator 14

linking

exit bins 72

linking exit bins 72

linking trays 71

Load Manual Feeder with [custom

string] 259

Load Manual Feeder with [custom

type name] 259

Load Manual Feeder with

[size] 259

Load Manual Feeder with [type]

[size] 259

Load staples 259

2000-sheet high-capacity feeder 66

550-sheet tray (standard or optional) 63

letterhead in 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder 66

letterhead in multipurpose feeder 79

multipurpose feeder 68

loading card stock

in multipurpose feeder 68

loading envelopes

in multipurpose feeder 68

loading the multipurpose

feeder 68

loading the standard tray 63

loading transparencies in multipurpose feeder 68

lock, security 13

M

making copies using paper from

selected tray 92

memory

types installed on printer 218

memory card

installing 23

troubleshooting 287

Memory full, cannot print

faxes 260

menu settings page

printing 40

menus

Active NIC 147

AppleTalk 152

Bin Setup 145

Confidential Print 162

Configure MP 137

Copy Settings 172

Custom Bin Names 144

Custom Names 143

Custom Scan Sizes 144

Custom Types 143

Default Source 134

diagram of 131

Disk Wiping 162

Edit Security Setups 160

E-mail Settings 189

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 179

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 187

Finishing 206

Flash Drive 199

FTP Settings 194

General Settings 165

Help 217

HTML 215

Image 216

IPv6 151

Miscellaneous 161

Network [x] 147

Network Card 149

Network Reports 149

Paper Loading 141

Paper Size/Type 134

Paper Texture 138

Paper Weight 140

Parallel [x] 155

PCL Emul 212

PDF 211

PostScript 212

Quality 208

Reports 146

Security Audit Log 163

Serial [x] 157

Set Date and Time 164

Setup 204

SMTP Setup menu 159

Standard Network 147

Standard USB 153

Substitute Size 138

Supplies 132

TCP/IP 150

Utilities 211

Wireless 152

XPS 216

menus diagram 131

Miscellaneous menu 161

moving the printer 235, 236

multipurpose feeder loading 68

N

Network [x] menu 147

Network Card menu 149

network options 19

Network Reports menu 149

network setup page printing 40

Networking Guide

where to find 237

noise emission levels 309

non-volatile memory 218 erasing 219

notices 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317

0

options

2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder, installing 37

550-sheet tray, installing 37

fax card 19

firmware card 25

firmware cards 19

flash memory card 25

Internal Solutions Port, installing 27

memory card, installing 23

memory cards 19

network 19

order of installation 37

ports 19

printer hard disk, installing 31

printer hard disk, removing 36

updating in printer driver 41

options, touch-screen

copy 98, 99, 100, 125

e-mail 105, 106, 107

fax 119, 120

FTP 124, 125, 126

scan to computer 129, 130

ordering

cleaning kit 231

fuser or transfer module 230

print cartridges 229

staple cartridges 230

waste toner bottle 230

ordering a print cartridge 229

output file type

changing 104

P

paper

characteristics 73

different sizes, copying 93

letterhead 74

preprinted forms 74

recycled 74

saving 96

selecting 74

storing 76

unacceptable 74

Universal Paper Size 144

Universal size setting 62

using recycled 56

paper feed troubleshooting

message remains after jam is cleared 288

paper jams

avoiding 240

paper jams, clearing

200 paper jam 242

201 paper jam 242

202–203 paper jams 243

230 paper jam 244

231–239 paper jams 245

24x paper jam 245

250 paper jam 246

280–289 paper jam 247

280-299 224

290–292 paper jams 248

400–403 paper jams 248

431–438 paper jams 249

460–461 paper jams 248

Paper Loading menu 141

paper size

setting 62

Paper Size/Type menu 134

paper sizes

supported by printer 76

Paper Texture menu 138

paper type

setting 62

paper types

duplex support 78

supported by printer 78

where to load 78

Paper Weight menu 140

Parallel [x] menu 155

PCL Emul menu 212

PDF menu 211

photos

copying 91

placing separator sheets between

copies 95

port settings

configuring 49

PostScript menu 212

print cartridge

replacing 231

print cartridges

ordering 229

print irregularities 293

print job

canceling, from computer 88

print quality

cleaning the ADF parts 224

cleaning the printhead lenses 226

cleaning the scanner glass 223

isolating problems 86

print quality troubleshooting

black streaks on a page 297

blank pages 289

characters have jagged edges 289

clipped images 290

colors not aligned properly 290

fine horizontal lines 291

gray background on prints 292

isolating print quality problems 288

light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 293

poor transparency quality 301

print irregularities 293

print is too dark 294

print is too light 295

repeating print defects 296

shadow images appear on prints 291

skewed print 296

solid color or black pages appear on prints 297

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 298

streaked vertical lines 298

toner fog or background shading 299

toner rubs off 300

toner specks 300

uneven print density 301

white streaks on a page 297

print troubleshooting

error reading USB drive 270

held jobs do not print 271

incorrect characters print 272

incorrect margins 292

jammed pages are not reprinted 288

job prints from wrong tray 272

job prints on wrong paper 272

jobs do not print 270

Large jobs do not collate 273

multiple-language PDF files do not print 270

paper curl 293

paper frequently jams 287

print job takes longer than expected 272

tray linking does not work 272

unexpected page breaks 273

printer

configurations 10

finishing features 86

moving 235, 236

shipping 236

printer configurations 10

printer control panel 14

adjusting brightness 59

factory defaults, restoring 239

printer hard disk

disposing of 218

encrypting 221

installing 31

removing 36

troubleshooting 286

printer hard disk encryption 221

printer information

where to find 9

printer messages

1565 Emulation error, load emulation option 269

31.xx Missing or Defective [color] cartridge 262

32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device 262

34 Incorrect paper size, open [src] 262

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 262

37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 263

37 Insufficient memory to collate job 263

37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted 263

38 Memory full 263

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 263

40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge 263

51 Defective flash detected 263

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 264

54 Network [x] software error 264

54 Serial option [x] error 264

54 Standard network software error 264

55 Unsupported option in slot [x] 264

56 Parallel port [x] disabled 265

56 Serial port [x] disabled 265

56 Standard parallel port disabled 265

56 Standard USB port disabled 265

56 USB port [x] disabled 265

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored 265

58 Input config error 266

58 Too many bins attached 266

58 Too many disks installed 266

58 Too many flash options installed 266

58 Too many trays attached 266

59 Incompatible output bin [x] 267

61 Remove defective disk 267

62 Disk full 267

80.xx Fuser life warning 267

80.xx Fuser missing 267

80.xx Fuser near life warning 267

80.xx Replace fuser 267

82.xx Replace waste toner bottle 268

82.xx Waste toner bottle missing 268

82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 268

83.xx Replace transfer module 268

83.xx Transfer module life warning 268

83.xx Transfer module missing 268

840.01 Scanner disabled by admin 269

840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. 269

88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low 269

88.xx [color] cartridge low 268, 269

88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low 268

Adjusting color 252

an error has occurred with the flash drive 252

an error has occurred with the USB drive 252

Change [input src] to [custom type name] load [orientation] 253

Change [src] to [custom string] 253

Change [src] to [custom string] load [orientation] 253

Change [src] to [custom type name] 253

Change [src] to [size] 254

Change [src] to [size] [type] 254

Change [src] to [size] [type] load [orientation] 254

Change [src] to [size] load [orientation] 254

Check [src] orientation or guides 255

Close [tray] door 255

Close finisher top cover 255

Close paper transport cover 255

Close top access cover 255

Disk corrupted 255

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space. 256

Disk problem 256

Empty the hole punch box 256

Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. 256

Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator. 256

Fax Station Name not set up 257

Fax Station Number not set up 257

Insert hole punch box 257

Insert staple cartridge 258

Insert Tray [x] 258

Install bin [x] 257

Install Tray [x] 257

Load [src] with [custom string] 258

Load [src] with [custom type name] 258

Load [src] with [size] 258

Load [src] with [type] [size] 258

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] 259

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] 259

Load Manual Feeder with [size] 259

Load Manual Feeder with [type] [size] 259

Load staples 259

Memory full, cannot print faxes 260

Reattach bin [x] 260

Reattach bin [x] - [y] 260

Remove packaging material, [area name] 261

Remove paper from [linked bin set name] 261

Remove paper from all bins 261

Remove paper from bin [x] 261

Remove paper from standard output bin 261

Restore Held Jobs? 261

Scanner automatic feeder cover open 261

Slide finisher to the left 261

Some held jobs were not restored 256

Supply needed to complete job 261

Tray [x] paper size unsupported 262

Unsupported disk 261

Unsupported USB device, please remove 256

printer options troubleshooting

2,000-sheet drawer problems 285

cannot detect flash memory card 286

cannot detect printer hard disk 286

internal print server 287

Internal Solutions Port 286

memory card 287

option not working 284

paper tray problems 285

USB/parallel interface card 287

printer problems, solving basic 270

printer software installing 40

printhead lenses cleaning 226

printing

black-and-white 86

canceling, from printer control panel 88

directory list 85

font sample list 85

forms 53

from flash drive 84

from Macintosh 79

from Windows 79

menu settings page 40

network setup page 40

on letterhead 79

print quality test pages 86

printing a directory list 85

printing a document 79

printing a font sample list 85

printing a menu settings page 40

printing a network setup page 40

printing confidential and other held jobs

from a Macintosh computer 82 from Windows 82

printing from a flash drive 84

printing in black and white 86

printing on letterhead 79

printing print quality test pages 86 publications

where to find 9

Q

Quality menu 208

Quiet Mode

print quality troubleshooting 291

R

Reattach bin [x] 260

Reattach bin [x] - [y] 260

reattaching the system board

cover 20

recycled paper

using 56,74

recycling

Lexmark packaging 61

Lexmark products 60

toner cartridges 61

WEEE statement 309

reducing a copy 94

reducing printer noise 57

Remove packaging material, [area name] 261

Remove paper from [linked bin set name] 261

Remove paper from all bins 261

Remove paper from bin [x] 261

Remove paper from standard output bin 261

removing printer hard disk 36

repeat print jobs 82

printing from a Macintosh computer 82

printing from Windows 82

repeating print defects 296

replacing a print cartridge 231

replacing the waste toner bottle 234

reports

viewing 238

Reports menu 146

reserve print jobs 82

printing from a Macintosh computer 82

printing from Windows 82

resolution, fax

changing 116

Restore Held Jobs? 261

restoring factory default

settings 239

S

safety information 7,8

saving paper 96

Scan Center features 128

scan to computer

advanced options, setting 130

options 129, 130

original size 129

paper orientation, setting 130

scan troubleshooting

cannot scan from a computer 278

partial document or photo scans 277

scan was not successful 276

scanner unit does not close 274

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 276

ScanBack Utility using 128

scanner

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 12

functions 11

registration 227

scanner glass 12

Scanner automatic feeder cover

open 261

scanner glass

cleaning 223

scanner glass (flatbed)

copying using 91

scanning

from a flash drive 128

to a computer 127

to an FTP address 122

to an FTP, using address book 123

scanning documents at the

printer 54

scanning to a computer 127

scanning to a flash drive 128

scanning to an FTP address

creating shortcuts using the computer 123

using shortcut numbers 122

using the address book 123

using the touch screen 122

scanning to computer

document type, setting 129

Security Audit Log menu 163

security lock 13

sending a fax using the touch

screen 114

sending fax at a scheduled

time 117

separator roll

ordering 230

Serial [x] menu 157

serial printing

setting up 50

Set Date and Time menu 164

setting

TCP/IP address 150

setting the fax number or station number 113

setting the outgoing fax name or station name 113

setting the paper size 62

setting the paper type 62

setting the Universal paper size 62

setting up e-mail alerts using the

Embedded Web Server 238

setting up serial printing 50

setting up the printer

on a wired network

(Macintosh) 47

on a wired network

(Windows) 47

settings, document type fax 118

Setup menu 204

shadow images appear on

prints 291

shipping the printer 236

shortcuts, creating e-mail 102

fax destination 115

FTP address 124

FTP destination 123

Sleep Mode

adjusting 58

Slide finisher to the left 261

SMTP Setup menu 159

solid color or black pages appear on

prints 297

Some held jobs were not

restored 256

standard exit bin lighting, setting 60

Standard Network menu 147

standard tray

loading 63

Standard USB menu 153

staple cartridges

ordering 230

staple jam, clearing 455 staple jam 249

statement of volatility 218

status of supplies checking 228

storing

paper 76

supplies 228

storing print jobs 82

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 298

streaks appear on a page 297

subject and message information adding to e-mail 104

Substitute Size menu 138

supplies

checking status 228

checking, from printer control panel 228

checking, using the Embedded Web Server 228

conserving 56

storing 228

using recycled paper 56

Supplies menu 132

supplies, ordering

ADF pick assembly 230

cleaning kit 231

fuser or transfer module 230

print cartridges 229

separator roll 230

staple cartridges 230

waste toner bottle 230

Supply needed to complete job 261

supported flash drives 83

supported paper sizes 76

supported paper types and weights 78

system board

accessing 20

system board cover

attaching 20

reattaching 20

T

TCP/IP menu 150

telecommunication

notices 312, 313, 314, 315

tips

card stock 81

labels, paper 81

on using envelopes 80

on using letterhead 79

on using transparencies 80

tips on using envelopes 80

tips on using letterhead 79

toner cartridges

recycling 61

toner darkness

adjusting 86

touch screen

buttons 16

transparencies

copying on 91

loading 80

loading in multipurpose feeder 68

tips on using 80

using 80

Tray [x] paper size

unsupported 262

tray linking

assigning a custom paper type name 72

tray unlinking

assigning a custom paper type name 72

trays

linking 71

unlinking 71

troubleshooting

A network destination stopped working or is invalid 283

an application error has occurred 282

application icon is missing 282

cannot open Embedded Web Server 304

checking an unresponsive printer 270

checking an unresponsive scanner 276

contacting customer support 305

FAQ about color printing 301

Forms are not available or are not working 281

indicator light is blinking 252

printer cannot scan to selected destination 283

Scan to Network 282, 283

solving basic printer problems 270

troubleshooting, copy

copier does not respond 273

partial document or photo copies 275

poor copy quality 274

poor scanned image quality 277

scanner unit does not close 274

troubleshooting, display

display is blank 270

display shows only diamonds 270

troubleshooting, fax

caller ID is not shown 278

can receive but not send faxes 280

can send but not receive faxes 280

cannot send or receive a fax 278

received fax has poor print quality 281

troubleshooting, paper feed

message remains after jam is cleared 288

troubleshooting, print

error reading USB drive 270

held jobs do not print 271

incorrect characters print 272

incorrect margins 292

jammed pages are not reprinted 288

job prints from wrong tray 272

job prints on wrong paper 272

jobs do not print 270

Large jobs do not collate 273

multiple-language PDF files do not print 270

paper curl 293

paper frequently jams 287

print job takes longer than expected 272

tray linking does not work 272

unexpected page breaks 273

troubleshooting, print quality

black streaks on a page 297

blank pages 289

characters have jagged edges 289

clipped images 290

colors not aligned properly 290

fine horizontal lines 291

gray background on prints 292

isolating print quality problems 288

light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 293

poor transparency quality 301

print irregularities 293

print is too dark 294

print is too light 295

repeating print defects 296

shadow images appear on prints 291

skewed print 296

solid color or black pages appear on prints 297

streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 298

streaked vertical lines 298

toner fog or background shading 299

toner rubs off 300

toner specks 300

uneven print density 301

white streaks on a page 297

troubleshooting, printer options

2,000-sheet drawer problems 285

cannot detect flash memory card 286

cannot detect printer hard disk 286

internal print server 287

Internal Solutions Port 286

memory card 287

option not working 284

paper tray problems 285

USB/parallel interface card 287

troubleshooting, scan

cannot scan from a computer 278

partial document or photo scans 277

scan was not successful 276

scanner unit does not close 274

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 276

U

understanding the home screen

buttons 15

uneven print density 301

unexpected page breaks 273

Universal Paper Size 144 setting 62

Universal Setup menu 144

unlinking trays 71

Unsupported USB device, please remove 256

updating options in printer

driver 41

USB port 38

USB/parallel interface card troubleshooting 287

using Eco-Mode 57

using Forms and Favorites 53

using Hibernate Mode 59

using Quiet Mode 57

using recycled paper 56

using the address book 103

using the Embedded Web

Server 237

using the ScanBack Utility 128

Utilities menu 211

V

verify print jobs 82

printing from a Macintosh

computer 82

printing from Windows 82

viewing

reports 238

viewing a fax log 117

virtual display

checking, using Embedded Web

Server 238

volatile memory 218

erasing 219

volatility

statement of 218

W

waste toner bottle

ordering 230

replacing 234

wiping the hard disk 219

wired network setup

using Macintosh 47

using Windows 47

Wireless menu 152

wireless network

configuration information 41

installation, using Macintosh 44

installation, using Windows 42

wireless network setup

in Windows 42

wireless printer setup

in Macintosh 44

X

XPS menu 216

AT	BE	BG	CH	CY	CZ	DE	DK	EE
EL	ES	FI	FR	HR	HU	IE	IS	IT
LI	LT	LU	LV	MT	NL	NO	PL	PT
RO	SE	SI	SK	TR	UK

AT	BE	BG	CH	CY	CZ	DE	DK	EE
EL	ES	FI	FR	HR	HU	IE	IS	IT
LI	LT	LU	LV	MT	NL	NO	PL	PT
RO	SE	SI	SK	TR	UK

X792dtpe - Printer LEXMARK - Free user manual and instructions

This manual is not available in your language

User questions about X792dtpe LEXMARK

USER MANUAL X792dtpe LEXMARK

Contents

Safety information....7

Learning about the printer....9

Additional printer setup....19

Setting up and using the home screen applications....52

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact....56

Loading paper and specialty media....62

Paper and specialty media guidelines....73

Printing....79

Copying....90

E-mailing....101

Faxing....108

Scanning to an FTP address....122

Scanning to a computer or flash drive....127

Understanding printer menus....131

Securing the printer hard disk and other installed memory....218

Maintaining the printer....222

Administrative support....237

Clearing jams....240

Troubleshooting....252

Notices....306

Index....325

Safety information

Learning about the printer

Thank you for choosing this printer!

Printer configurations

Basic functions of the scanner

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

Using the ADF

Using the scanner glass

Using the security lock feature

Understanding the printer control panel

Understanding the home screen

Using the touch-screen buttons

Sample touch screen

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

Available internal options

Accessing the system board

Installing a memory card

Installing a flash memory or firmware card

Notes:

Installing an Internal Solutions Port

Installing a printer hard disk

Removing a printer hard disk

Order of installation

Installing optional trays

Attaching cables

Verifying printer setup

Printing a menu settings page

Printing a network setup page

Setting up the printer software

Installing the printer software

For Windows users

For Macintosh users

Using the World Wide Web

Updating available options in the printer driver

For Windows users

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

Setting up wireless printing

Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)

Prepare to configure the printer

Enter the printer information

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

Configure the printer for wireless access

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier

AT	BE	BG	CH	CY	CZ	DE	DK	EE
EL	ES	FI	FR	HR	HU	IE	IS	IT
LI	LT	LU	LV	MT	NL	NO	PL	PT
RO	SE	SI	SK	TR	UK